Cadillac 2010 Cts V Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Cadillac Cadillac-2010-Cadillac-Cts-V-Owners-Manual-813089 cadillac-2010-cadillac-cts-v-owners-manual-813089 cadillac pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 464

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2010 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 3-2
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-51
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Universal Remote System . . . . 4-61
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-17
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-26
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-37
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-44
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-60

2010 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 9-110
Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 10-3
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 10-11

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 12-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-13
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Introduction

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM
Emblem, CADILLAC, the CADILLAC
Crest and Wreath, and the name
CTS/CTS-V are registered
trademarks of General Motors.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25834994 B Second Printing

Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music
recognition technology and
related content delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.

DTS and DTS Digital surround
are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater systems, Inc.

iii

Dolby® is manufactured under
license from Dolby® Laboratories.
Dolby®, MLP Lossless, and the
double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby® Laboratories.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.

Introduction

Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
www.helminc.com

Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.

{ WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is
a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not
let this happen.”

Symbols
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message, gage,
or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.

Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls

or OnStar

$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gage
+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid

Introduction

2 NOTES

Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and
Windows

Doors

Windows

Trunk (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Liftgate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Vehicle Security
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 1-12
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Central Door Unlocking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 1-15
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . .

1-23
1-23
1-24
1-24
1-25

Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

1-26
1-27
1-27
1-27

Interior Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

1-2

Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks
Keys

{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.

{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.

Keys, Doors and Windows

1-3

One of the following keys comes
with the vehicle.

This key is used for the driver door,
ignition, and glove box.

This key, located inside the keyless
access transmitter, is used for the
driver door, glove box, and rear seat
pass-through door. See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door” under Trunk
(Sedan) on page 1‑17 for more
information.

This type of transmitter has a thin
button (A) near the bottom of
the keyless access transmitter.
To remove the key, press (A) and
pull the key out. Never pull the key
out without pressing the button.

1-4

Keys, Doors and Windows
Notice: If you ever lock your keys
in the vehicle, you may have to
damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Contact Roadside Service if you
are locked out of the vehicle.
See Roadside Service on
page 12‑6.

Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
Notice: If the transmitter does not
have a button near the base, do
not pull on the chrome base of
the transmitter. This type of
transmitter does not have a key
inside. Pulling on the base of this
transmitter could damage it.
This vehicle may have the Keyless
Access System. See Ignition
Positions (Key Access) on
page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 8‑19 for
information on starting the vehicle.
See your dealer/retailer if a new key
is needed.

See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
and Science Canada.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.

Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.

Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.

Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.

If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician for service.

Keys, Doors and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
(Key Access)
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up to
20 m (65 feet) away from the
vehicle.
There are other conditions that can
affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑4.

Q (Lock):

Press to lock all the

doors.
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
parking lamps may flash once to
indicate locking has occurred.
The horn may chirp when Q is
pressed again within five seconds.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑51 for additional
information.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door. If K is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps
come on and stay on for 20 seconds
or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the
parking lamps flash twice to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51.

Do not pull on the chrome base of
the transmitter.

1-5

V /& (Remote Trunk/Liftgate
Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the
trunk/liftgate. The automatic
transmission must be in P (Park) or
the manual transmission must be in
Neutral with the parking brake set.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The turn signal
lamps flash and the horn sounds
three times.
Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to activate the panic
alarm. The turn signal lamps
flash and the horn sounds for
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is moved to
START or L is pressed again.
The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF
for the panic alarm to work.

1-6

Keys, Doors and Windows

The vehicle comes with two
transmitters. Each transmitter
will have a number on top of it,
“1” or “2”. These numbers
correspond to the driver of the
vehicle. For example, the memory
seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter
labeled “1”, if enabled through the
DIC. See “Memory Seat” under
Power Seat Adjustment on
page 2‑4 and Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51
for more information.

Programming Transmitters
to the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased
and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the
replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also

be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the
new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight
transmitters programmed to it.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31.

Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the Replace
Battery In Remote Key message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery In Remote Key” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑42
for additional information.

To replace the battery:

Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.

1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object inserted into
the notch, located above the
metal base.

3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.

Keys, Doors and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
(Keyless Access)

To access the rear doors first, pull
the rear door handle once to unlock
all doors and a second time to open
the door.

The Keyless Access System
transmitter functions will work up to
60 m (195 feet) away from the
vehicle.

Entering any door other than the
driver door will always cause all of
the doors to unlock. This is not
customizable.

The Keyless Access System lets
you lock and unlock the doors and
access the trunk without removing
the remote transmitter from your
pocket, purse, briefcase, etc.
The keyless access transmitter must
be within 1 m (3 feet) of the door or
trunk being opened.

To customize which doors unlock
when the driver's door is opened,
see “Keyless Unlock” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51.

Keyless Unlocking
With the keyless access transmitter
within 1 m (3 feet), approach the
front door and pull the handle to
unlock and open the door. If the
transmitter is recognized, the door
will unlock and open.

Keyless Locking
The doors lock after several
seconds if all doors are closed and
at least one keyless access
transmitter has been removed from
the interior of the vehicle. It does not
matter how far away that one
transmitter is from the vehicle.

1-7

To customize whether the doors
automatically lock when you exit the
vehicle, see “Keyless Locking”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑51.
Keyless Trunk Opening
Press the trunk release button
located on the trunk lid above the
license plate to open the trunk if the
keyless access transmitter is within
range.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑4.

1-8

Keys, Doors and Windows

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
only the driver door. The turn signal
indicators flash twice.
Press K twice within five seconds
to unlock all the doors. The interior
lamps may come on.

With Remote Start Shown,
Without Similar

Q (Lock):

Press once to lock the
doors. The turn signal indicators
flash. When Q is pressed twice, the
turn signal indicators flash twice,
and the horn sounds once to
confirm locking.

To program the vehicle so the turn
signal indicators do not flash and
the horn does not sound when
pressing Q on the keyless access
transmitter, see “Remote Door
Lock Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51.

To program the vehicle so the turn
signal indicators do not flash and
the fog lamps and reverse lamps
remain on steady for about
20 seconds when the keyless
access transmitter is used to unlock
the vehicle, see “Remote Door
Unlock Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51.
For vehicles with the memory
feature, press K on the keyless
access transmitter to program and
recall the memory settings. See
“Memory Seat” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 2‑4 for more
information.

/ (Remote Start):

Press to
operate the remote start feature.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 1‑12 for additional
information.

V / & (Remote Trunk/Liftgate
Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the
trunk/liftgate. The automatic
transmission must be in P (Park) or
the manual transmission must be in
Neutral with the parking brake set.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The horn sounds
three times and the turn signal
lamps flash three times.
Press and hold L for
three seconds to sound the
panic alarm. The horn sounds
and the turn signal lamps flash
for 30 seconds. Press and
release L again to stop
the alarm.

Keys, Doors and Windows
The vehicle comes with two
transmitters. Each transmitter will
have a number on top of it,
“1” or “2”. These numbers
correspond to the driver of the
vehicle. For example, the memory
seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter
labeled “1”, if enabled through the
DIC. See “Memory Seat” under
Power Seat Adjustment on
page 2‑4 and Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51 for
more information.

Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter

Programming Transmitters
to the Vehicle

3. Insert the vehicle key into the
key lock cylinder located on the
outside of the driver door.

Only keyless access transmitters
programmed to the vehicle will work.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased
and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be
reprogrammed so that lost or
stolen transmitters no longer work.
Each vehicle can have up to
four transmitters matched to it.

1-9

A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada, two
recognized transmitters are required
to program a new transmitter.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Place the recognized
transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
Have the new transmitter
available with you.

4. Turn the key to the unlock
position five times within
five seconds.
5. The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays Ready To Learn
Electronic Key #2, 3 or 4.

6. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing the front of the
vehicle. The transmitter pocket
is inside the center console
storage area located between
the driver and front passenger
seats.
7. A beep sounds once the
transmitter is programmed.
The DIC displays Ready To
Learn Electronic Key #3 or 4,
or Maximum # Electronic Keys
Learned.

1-10

Keys, Doors and Windows

8. Press the ignition control knob to
exit programming mode.
9. Remove the transmitter from
the transmitter pocket and
press K on the keyless access
transmitter two times.

The procedure requires three,
ten minute cycles to complete the
matching process.

3. Insert the vehicle key into the
key lock cylinder located on the
driver door.

1. The vehicle must be off.

4. Turn the key to the unlock
position five times within
five seconds.

10. To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 6
through 9.

5. The DIC displays Press Start
Control To Learn Keys.

Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter

7. The DIC reads Learn Delay
Active Wait XX Min and counts
down to zero.

United States owners are permitted
to program a new transmitter to
their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available. The
Canadian immobilizer standard
requires that Canadian owners
see their dealer/retailer for
programming new transmitters
when two recognized transmitters
are not available.

6. Press the ignition switch in.

8. The DIC displays Press Start
Control To Learn Keys again.
2. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing the front of the
vehicle. The transmitter pocket
is inside the center console
storage area located between
the driver and front passenger
seats.

9. Press the ignition switch in
again.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9.
11. The DIC reads Learn Delay
Active Wait XX Min and counts
down to zero.
12. A beep sounds and the
DIC reads Ready To Learn
Electronic Key # X. All
previously known transmitter
programming has been erased.

Keys, Doors and Windows
13. A beep sounds once
programming is complete.
The DIC displays Ready
To Learn Electronic Key # 2.
To program additional
transmitters, insert each
transmitter in the pocket until
a beep is heard and the
DIC advances to the next
electronic key number. Up to
four transmitters can be
programmed. The DIC displays
Maximum # Electronic Keys
Learned and exits the
programming mode.
Press the ignition control knob
to complete the process.
14. Press the ignition control knob
if programming is complete.
15. Press K on each newly
programmed transmitter to
complete the process.

Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
Replace the battery if the Replace
Battery In Remote Key message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery In Remote Key” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑42
for additional information.
If the transmitter battery is weak, the
DIC may display Electronic Key Not
Detected when you try to start the
vehicle. To start the vehicle, place
the transmitter in the center console
storage area transmitter pocket with
the buttons facing to the front of the
vehicle. Then, with the vehicle in
P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the
brake pedal and the ignition control
knob. See Starting the Engine on
page 8‑20, for additional
information about the vehicle's
electronic keyless ignition with push
start. Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.

1-11

Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object inserted into the
slot on the side or back of the
transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.

1-12

Keys, Doors and Windows

3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.

Remote Vehicle Start
This vehicle may have a remote
starting feature that allows you to
start the engine from outside the
vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
The automatic climate control will
begin to heat or cool your vehicle
during remote start depending on
the temperature inside and outside
of the vehicle. The windshield
defroster and/or rear window
defogger turn on if it is cold outside.
If the vehicle has heated seats,
they may also be turned on during
remote start to warm up the seat in
cold weather. Normal operation of
the climate control system returns

after the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on
page 7‑1.

Starting the Engine Using
Remote Start

Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local
regulations for any requirements on
remote starting of vehicles.

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle
and press Q on the transmitter.

If your vehicle is low on fuel,
do not use the remote start feature.
The vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, the RKE transmitter
functions will have an increased
range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle
is running.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑4
for additional information.

To start the engine using the remote
start feature:

2. Press and hold / for at least
four seconds or until the
vehicle's turn signal lamps flash.
The parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the
engine is running. The vehicle's
doors will be locked.
3. After entering the vehicle during
a remote start, press the brake
pedal and turn the ignition to
ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
After a remote start, the engine
will automatically shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension has been done or the
ignition has been turned to
ON/RUN.

Keys, Doors and Windows
Extending Engine Run Time
To extend the engine run time by
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 and 2
while the engine is still running.
The engine run time can only be
extended if it is the first remote start
since the vehicle has been driven.
Remote start can be extended
one time.

A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
After the vehicle's engine has been
started two times using the remote
start button, the ignition must be
turned on and then back off before
the remote start procedure can be
used again.

If the remote start procedure is used
again before the first 10 minute
time frame has ended, the first
10 minutes will immediately expire
and the second 10 minute time
frame will start.

Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start

For example, if the lock button and
then the remote start buttons are
pressed again after the vehicle has
been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for a total of
15 minutes.

To manually shut off the engine
after a remote start, do any of the
following:

Press / until the parking lamps
turn off.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.

1-13

Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if any of the following
occur:
.

The ignition is in any position
other than LOCK/OFF.

A keyless access transmitter is
inside the vehicle.

The vehicle's hood is not closed.

The hazard warning flashers
are on.

There is an emission control
system malfunction.

The engine coolant temperature
is too high.

The oil pressure is low.

Two remote vehicle starts
have already been used.
The maximum number of remote
starts or remote start attempts
between ignition cycles with the
key is two.

1-14

Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks

{ WARNING

WARNING (Continued)
.

Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.

Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.

Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.

Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
(Continued)

There are several ways to lock and
unlock the vehicle.
From the outside, use the key,
or press the lock or unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation
(Key Access) on page 1‑5 or

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Keyless Access)
on page 1‑7 for more information.
On vehicles with the Remote
Keyless Access system, the door
unlocks by pulling the door handle
when you have the transmitter with
you. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 1‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 1‑7 for more information.
If the windows are down and the
doors are locked, do not reach in to
manually unlock the vehicle
because you will set off the alarm.
From the inside, press the power
door lock switch located on the front
door. See Power Door Locks on
page 1‑15.
Push down or pull up on the manual
lock knob, located at the top of the
door near the window, for the rear
doors.

Keys, Doors and Windows

Central Door Unlocking
System
The vehicle has a central door
unlocking feature. When unlocking
the driver door, the other doors can
be unlocked by holding the key
in the turned position for a
few seconds or by quickly turning
the key twice in the lock cylinder.

Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks,
the switches are located on the front
doors.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Q (Lock):

Remove the key from
the ignition and press to lock the
doors.

Delayed Locking
With this feature, you can delay the
actual locking of the doors.
When the power door lock switch is
pressed when the key is not in the
ignition and the driver door is
opened, a chime will sound three
times indicating that delayed locking
is active.
When all the doors are closed, the
doors will lock automatically after
five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed,
the five second timer will reset itself
once all the doors are closed again.
You can press the door lock switch
again or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter to override this feature
and lock the doors immediately.

Automatic Door Locks
If the vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the vehicle is
programmed so that the doors will
lock automatically when all doors
are closed, the ignition is on, and

1-15

the shift lever is moved out of
P (Park). The doors will
automatically unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is moved into P (Park).
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, the vehicle is
programmed so that the doors will
lock automatically after the vehicle
speed reaches 8 km (5 mph). The
doors will automatically unlock when
the ignition is turned off and the key
is removed from the ignition.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle
once the doors are locked, have
that person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch. When the
door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual lever
or the power door lock switch to lock
the door.
The power door locks can be
programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). For more information
on programming, see Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51.

1-16

Keys, Doors and Windows

Lockout Protection

Safety Locks

To set the locks:

If the power door lock switch is
pressed when the key is in the
ignition and a door is open, all the
doors will lock and only the driver
door will unlock. If the doors are
closed, they can be locked by using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking
the vehicle.

The vehicle has rear door security
locks. These prevent passengers
from opening the rear doors from
the inside.

1. Insert the key into the security
lock slot and turn it so the slot is
in the horizontal position.
When you want to open a rear door
when the security lock is on:
1. Unlock the door using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or
Keyless Access System
transmitter, if the vehicle has
one, the power door lock switch,
or the rear door manual lock.

This feature can be overridden by
pressing the lock button on the RKE
transmitter or by pressing the power
lock switch a second time.
On vehicles with a Keyless Access
System, the system can be
programmed to alert you when
all the doors are closed and a
transmitter has been left inside
of the vehicle. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51 for
more information.

2. Close the door.

2. Open the door from the outside.

Lock Label shown
The rear door security locks are
located on the inside edge of each
rear door. The rear doors must be
open to access them. The label
showing lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.

To cancel the rear door
security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from
the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security
lock slot and turn it so the slot is
in the vertical position.

Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors

WARNING (Continued)

Trunk (Sedan)

Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.

If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.

{ WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.

Close all of the windows.

Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)

For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.

1-17

Trunk Lock Release

The remote trunk release button is
located on the lower portion of the
driver door.
To use the remote trunk release, the
shift lever must be in P (Park) or
N (Neutral) for a vehicle with an
automatic transmission. The shift
lever must be in N (Neutral), with the
parking brake set for a vehicle with
a manual transmission.

1-18

Keys, Doors and Windows

Press the button to open the trunk.
You can also press the button with
the trunk symbol on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
open the trunk.
With the Keyless Access System,
when you have the transmitter, the
trunk can be opened by the trunk
release button located on the rear of
the trunk above the license plate.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) and
the valet mode turned off.
If the vehicle is locked, the keyless
access transmitter must be within
3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk opening
for it to be recognized and allow the
trunk to open.
If the vehicle is ever without power,
the trunk area can still be accessed
by using one of the following
procedures.

On vehicles with a rear seat
pass-through door:
1. Fold the rear armrest down and
open the pass-through door.
See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”
following for more information.
2. Reach upward through the
opening to locate the emergency
trunk release handle. See
“Emergency Trunk Release
Handle” for more information.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release
handle to open the trunk lid.
On vehicles with a split folding
rear seat:
1. Fold down the rear seatback.
See Rear Seats on page 2‑10
for more information.
2. Reach upward through the
opening to locate the trunk
release handle.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release
handle to open the trunk lid.

Close the trunk by pulling on the
handle. Do not use the handle as a
tie-down.

Rear-Seat Pass Through
If the vehicle has the rear seat-pass
through door, the trunk can be
accessed through the rear seat.
This is useful when transporting
long items.
To open the door, pull down the rear
seat armrest. Then pull the lever all
the way down to release the door.
To close the door, push it up and
back into place. Then try to open
the door without pulling up on the
lever to make sure it is locked into
place.

Keys, Doors and Windows
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle (Sedan Only)

There is a glow-in-the-dark
emergency trunk release handle
located on the back wall of the
trunk. This handle will glow following
exposure to light. Pull the release
handle toward the front of the
vehicle to open the trunk from the
inside.

Liftgate (Wagon)

WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.

Close all of the windows.

Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.

Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.

If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.

Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)

1-19

For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.

1-20

Keys, Doors and Windows
Use this setting to prevent the
liftgate from opening into overhead
obstructions such as a garage door
or roof mounted cargo during power
operation. The liftgate can still be
opened fully manually.

The switch is located on the driver’s
door. The vehicle must be in
P (Park) to use the power feature.
The taillamps flash when the power
liftgate moves.

{ WARNING
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.

OFF: The liftgate only operates
manually in this position.

The power liftgate has three modes
of operation. Mode selection is
controlled by the interior mode
switch located on the driver door.
Choose the power liftgate mode by
turning the dial on the switch until
the indicator lines up with the
desired position.
The three modes are:
MAX: The liftgate power opens to
the full open height.
3/4: The liftgate power opens to a
reduced open height that can be set
by the vehicle operator in a range of
approximately ¾ open to full open.

Manual operation of a liftgate that
also has power operation requires
more effort than with a standard
manual liftgate.
In either the MAX or the ¾ mode,
the liftgate can be power opened
and closed by:
.

Press and hold the power liftgate
button & on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
until the liftgate starts moving.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
(Key Access) on page 1‑5 or
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7.

Keys, Doors and Windows
.

Press the power liftgate button
on the center of the mode
switch, located on the
driver’s door.

Press the touchpad switch on
the liftgate outside handle to
open the liftgate.

Pressing any button that operates
the power liftgate, or the touchpad
switch while the liftgate is moving,
stops it. Pressing the button or RKE
switch again reverses the direction.
There is a minimum that the power
liftgate must already be open for the
system to hold it open. If movement
is stopped below that minimum the
liftgate closes.
Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle.
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under extreme
temperatures or low battery
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
can still be operated manually.

Press and release the power
liftgate button on the liftgate
adjacent to the latch to close
the liftgate.

If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) while the power function is
in progress, the liftgate power
function will continue to completion.
If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) and accelerate before the
power liftgate latch is closed, the
liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of the

1-21

vehicle. Always make sure the
power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
If the liftgate is powered open and
the liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the turn signals will flash
and a chime will sound. The liftgate
will stay open temporarily, and then
slowly close. See your dealer/
retailer for service before using the
liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
during a power open or close cycle,
a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse
direction to the full closed or open
position. After removing the
obstruction, the power liftgate
operation can be used again.
If the liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate.
After removing the obstructions, the
liftgate will resume normal power
operation.

1-22

Keys, Doors and Windows

The vehicle has pinch sensors
located on the side edges of the
liftgate. If an object is caught
between the liftgate and the body
and presses against this sensor, the
liftgate will reverse direction and
open fully. The liftgate will remain
open until it is activated again or
closed manually.

Setting the Power Liftgate
Intermediate Mode
To change the liftgate stop position:
1. Turn the liftgate switch to either
the MAX, or the ¾ mode position
and power open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement at
the desired height by pressing
any button that operates the
power lift gate, or the touchpad
switch. Manually adjust the
liftgate position if required.

3. Press and hold the button on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch until
the turn signals flash and a beep
sounds to indicate that the new
setting is recorded.
When power opened with the
¾ mode selected, the liftgate
stops at the new set position.
If an audible and visual response is
not received when setting the
intermediate stop position, the
liftgate height is below the ¾ open
height minimum, approximately
5 feet at the edge of the liftgate.

Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, turn the mode switch
to OFF.
With the power liftgate disabled
and all of the doors unlocked, the
liftgate can be manually opened
and closed. Note: Manual efforts of

a vehicle equipped with a power
liftgate will be higher than a
standard non-power liftgate.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate, and lift the
gate open. To close the liftgate, use
the pull cup to lower the liftgate and
close. With the power liftgate
disabled the liftgate electric latch will
still power latch once contact is
made with the striker. Always close
the liftgate before driving.
If the RKE button is pressed while
power operation is disabled, the turn
signals will flash, and the liftgate will
not move.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.

Keys, Doors and Windows

Vehicle Security

Arming the System

Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities. This
vehicle has theft-deterrent features,
however, they do not make it
impossible to steal.

To arm the system,

Anti-Theft Alarm System

3. Close all doors. The security
light should go off after about
30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light
goes off.

This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.

The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
when the system is arming.

1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the
transmitter. The security light
should come on and stay on.

If a locked door or trunk is opened
without using the key in the driver's
door key cylinder or the transmitter,
a ten second pre-alarm will occur.
The horn will chirp and the lights will
flash. If the key is not placed in the
ignition and turned to START or the
door is not unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter
during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle's
headlamps will flash and the horn
will sound for about 30 seconds,
then will turn off to save the battery
power.

1-23

The theft-deterrent system will not
activate if the doors are locked with
the vehicle's key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if the power
door lock switch is used while the
door is open or with the transmitter.
You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the
correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
.

Lock the vehicle with the door
key after the doors are closed.

Always unlock a door with the
transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,
turn off the alarm by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter.
The alarm will not stop if you try to
unlock a door any other way.

1-24

Keys, Doors and Windows

How to Detect a Tamper
Condition

Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access)

If K is pressed and the horn
sounds, an attempted break-in has
occurred while the system was
armed.

This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.

If the alarm has been activated, the
Theft Attempted message will
appear on the DIC. See Key and
Lock Messages on page 4‑42 for
additional information.

Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
and Science Canada.

The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The key
uses a transponder that matches an
immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only the correct key
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged.

The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged,
try another ignition key.
If the engine still does not start and
the light continues to stay on try
another key.

Keys, Doors and Windows

1-25

If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start, the
first key may be damaged. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new key made.

3. After the engine has started,
turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and
remove the key.

Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access)

4. Insert the key to be programmed
and turn it to ON/RUN within
five seconds of the ignition being
turned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3.

This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.

It is possible for the theft-deterrent
system decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys can
be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for
programming additional keys only.

5. The security light will turn off
once the key has been
programmed. It may not be
apparent that the security light
went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.

The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the ignition
control knob is turned to LOCK/OFF.

To program a new key do the
following:
1. Verify that the new key has
stamped on it.

2. Insert the current driver's key in
the ignition and start the engine.
If the engine will not start see
your dealer/retailer for service.

6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4
if additional keys are to be
programmed.

The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.

The immobilization system is
disarmed when the ignition control
knob is pushed in and a valid
transmitter is found in the vehicle.

Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.

1-26

Keys, Doors and Windows

The system has one or more
keyless access transmitters that are
matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly
matched keyless access transmitter
will start the vehicle. If the keyless
access transmitter is ever damaged,
you may not be able to start your
vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition control knob off and try
again.
If the ignition control knob does not
rotate, and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be
undamaged, try another keyless
access transmitter. Or, you may try
placing the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket located in the
center console. See “Electronic Key
Not Detected” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 4‑42.

If the ignition control knob still does
not rotate with the other transmitter,
your vehicle needs service. If the
ignition control knob does rotate,
the first transmitter may be faulty.
See your dealer/retailer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new keyless access
transmitter programmed to the
vehicle.
It is possible for the immobilizer
system to learn new or replacement
keyless access transmitters. Up to
4 keyless access transmitters can
be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters,
see “Matching transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle” for Keyless Access under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors

{ CAUTION
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.

Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Mirrors

3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either } or | again to
deselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors
Manual

Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
To adjust each mirrors:
1. Press } or | to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired
direction.

Vehicles with manual fold mirrors
are folded inward toward the vehicle
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
Push the mirror outward, to return it
to the original position.

Heated Mirrors
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger”
under Climate Control for more
information.

1-27

Interior Mirrors
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror with
OnStar® controls, located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe
to OnStar. See OnStar System for
more information about the services
OnStar provides.

O (On/Off): Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
If the vehicle has a rear vision
camera (RVC). See Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) on page 8‑46 for
more information.

1-28

Keys, Doors and Windows

Automatic Dimming Mirror
Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of headlamps from behind
you. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates
each time the vehicle is started.

Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.

Power Windows

{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and
they could be seriously injured or
(Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows
WARNING (Continued)
killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave
keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.

In addition, each door has a switch
for its own window. The front power
window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down
movement and the rear power
window switch operates with one
position for up and two positions for
down movement. Press the switch
to the first position to lower the
window to the desired level. Pull the
switch up to raise the window.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) that allows
you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off.
For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 8‑19.

Driver Side Shown
The power window switches are
located on the driver door.

1-29

Express-Down/Up Windows
Windows with the express feature
allow the windows to be raised and
lowered all the way without holding
the switch.
Press or pull the switch fully and
release it to activate the express
feature.
The express mode can be canceled
at any time by briefly pressing or
pulling the switch.

Express Window Anti-Pinch
Feature
If any object is in the path of the
window when the express-up is
active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a
preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing
may also cause the window to
auto-reverse. The window will return
to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.

1-30

Keys, Doors and Windows

Express Window Anti-Pinch
Override

{ WARNING
If express override is activated,
the window will not reverse
automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could
be damaged. Before you use
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch
feature can be overridden in a
supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second
position. The window will rise for as
long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express
mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still
close on an object in its path. Use
care when using the override mode.

Programming the Power
Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged, disconnected,
or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window
for the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.

The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.

Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The rear
window lockout button is located on
the driver door near the window
switches.

1. With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close
all doors.

Press the right side of the button to
disable the rear window controls.
The light on the button will
illuminate, indicating the feature is in
use. The rear windows still can be
raised or lowered using the driver
window switches when the lockout
feature is active.

2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.

To restore power to the rear
windows, press the button again.
The light on the button will go out.

To program each front window,
follow these steps:

3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.

Keys, Doors and Windows

Sun Visors
Swing down the visor to block out
glare. It can also be detached from
the center mount and moved to
the side to block glare from that
direction.
The driver visor may also have
buttons for a built-in garage door
opener. See Universal Remote
System on page 4‑61 for more
information.

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror

1-31

Sunroof

Press and hold the rear of the
switch to open the sunshade.
Press and hold the front of the
switch to close the sunshade.

If the vehicle has a power sunroof it
will only operate when the ignition is
turned on, or in ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 8‑19.

Express-Open: To open the
sunshade, fully press and release
the rear of the driver side switch.
The sunshade will automatically
open. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.

The sunroof switches are located on
the overhead console.

Express-Close: To close the
sunshade, fully press and release
the front of the driver side switch.
The sunshade will automatically
close. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.

Roof

Pull the visor down and lift the cover
to access the mirror. A light comes
on when the cover is lifted and goes
out when it is closed.

The sunshade will open
automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.

The driver side switch operates the
sunshade.

1-32

Keys, Doors and Windows
Express-Close: To close the
sunroof, fully press and release the
front of the driver's side switch.
The sunroof will automatically close.
To stop the sunroof partway, press
the switch a second time.

The passenger side switch operates
the sunroof.
Express-Open: To open the
sunroof, fully press and release the
rear of the passenger side switch.
The sunroof will automatically open.
To stop the sunroof partway, press
the switch a second time.

Comfort Stop Feature: The
sunroof has a comfort stop feature
which stops the sunroof from
opening to the full-open position.
From the comfort stop position,
press the rear of the passenger side
switch a second time to open the
sunroof to the full-open position.
Vent Feature: Press and hold the
front of the passenger side switch to
vent the sunroof. The sunshade will
automatically open approximately
fifteen inches. Press and hold the
rear of the passenger side switch to
close the sunroof vent.

Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof/sunshade when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the
sunroof/sunshade from closing
at the point of the obstruction.
The sunroof/sunshade will then
return to the full-open position.
To close the sunroof/sunshade,
see “Express-Close” earlier in this
section.

Seats and Restraints

Seats and
Restraints
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 2-3

Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 2-7
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .

2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26

Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-29
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-40
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-42
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-42

2-1

Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . .

2-43
2-45
2-47
2-49
2-51
2-57
2-57
2-59

2-2

Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
The vehicle's rear seats have head
restraints in the outboard seating
positions, but they are not
adjustable.

{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle's head restraints are not
designed to be removed.

Seats and Restraints

Active Head Restraints
Active Head Restraint System
The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating
positions. These automatically tilt
forward to reduce the risk of neck
injury if the vehicle is hit from
behind.

Front Seats

2-3

To move a manual seat forward or
rearward:

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body
to be sure the seat is locked in
place.

2-4

Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment

Power Seats
On vehicles with power seats, the
controls are located on the outboard
side of the seats.

Raise or lower the rear part of
the seat cushion by moving the
rear of the horizontal control up
or down.

1: Saves the seating position for
driver 1.

Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire horizontal
control up or down.

The vertical control is used for
reclining the seatback. See “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑7
for more information.

Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel

Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or
rearward.

Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the horizontal control up
or down.

On vehicles with the memory
package the controls are located on
the driver door. This feature is used
to program and recall memory
settings for the driver seat, outside
mirror, and the steering wheel
position if the vehicle has the power
tilt wheel and telescopic steering
feature.

2: Saves the seating position for
driver 2.
Recalls the easy exit position.

To save your positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside
mirrors, and the steering wheel
to a comfortable position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two
beeps sound through the driver
side front speaker to let you
know that the position has been
stored.
3. Repeat the procedure for a
second driver using button 2.
To recall memory positions, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) for an
automatic transmission or the
parking brake applied for a
manual transmission. Press and
release either button 1 or button 2.

Seats and Restraints
A single beep will sound. The seat,
outside mirrors, and steering wheel
will move to the position previously
stored for the identified driver.
If the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used to enter the
vehicle and the remote recall
memory feature is on, automatic
seat and mirror movement occur.
On vehicles with the Keyless
Access System, automatic
adjustment occurs when the
driver door is opened.
To stop recall movement of the
memory feature at any time, press
one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, power tilt wheel
control, or power mirror buttons.

If something has blocked the driver
seat or the steering column while
recalling a memory position, the
recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction, then press the
appropriate control for the area that
is not recalling for two seconds.
Try recalling the memory position
again by pressing the appropriate
memory button. If the memory
position is still not recalling, see
your dealer/retailer for service.

Easy Exit Recall

S : With the vehicle in P (Park) for
an automatic transmission or the
parking brake applied for a manual
transmission, press the exit button
to recall the exit position.
If the easy exit seat feature is on
in the DIC, automatic seat and
power telescopic steering column
movement occurs when the key is
removed from the ignition.

2-5

On vehicles with the Keyless
Access System, automatic
adjustment occurs when the ignition
is turned to OFF and the driver door
is opened.
A single beep sounds. The driver
seat moves back, and if the vehicle
has the power tilt wheel and
telescopic steering feature, it moves
up and forward.
See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑51 for more information.
For more programming information,
see Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑51.

2-6

Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Adjustment

Press and hold the bottom of the
control to decrease support to
the top of the seatback and
increase support to the bottom
of the seatback.

Press and hold the front or rear
of the control to increase or
decrease support to the entire
seatback.

Side Bolster
On vehicles with this feature:
A. Seat Cushion Bolster
Adjustment Switch
The vehicle may have this feature.
The driver and passenger seatback
lumbar support can be adjusted by
moving the control located on the
outboard side of the seat cushions.
To increase or decrease support,
hold the control forward or rearward.
Adjust the seat as needed.

Press the top or bottom of
control (A) to increase or
decrease support in seat
cushion bolsters.

Press the top or bottom of the
control (C) to increase or
decrease support in the
seatback bolsters.

B. Lumbar Support Control Switch
C. Seatback Bolster Adjustment
Switch

Power Lumbar
On vehicles with this feature:
.

Press and hold the top of the
control (B) to increase support to
the top of the seatback and
decrease support to the bottom
of the lumbar.

Seats and Restraints

Thigh Support
Adjustment

Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

2-7

If the front passenger seat has a
manual reclining seatback, the lever
used to operate it is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seatback:

You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
On vehicles with this feature,
adjust the manual leg extension by
reaching under it, in the pocketed
area. Press the release button
and pull or push to lengthen or
shorten it. Release the button to
lock it in place.

1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback in
place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.

2-8

Seats and Restraints

To return the seatback to an upright
position:

{ WARNING

1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will
return to the upright position.

Sitting in a reclined position when
your vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even if you buckle up,
your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined
like this.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks
If the seats have power reclining
seatbacks, use the vertical power
seat control located on the outboard
side of each seat.

To recline the seatback, press
the control toward the rear of
the vehicle.
To raise the seatback, press the
control toward the front of the
vehicle.

The shoulder belt cannot do its
job. In a crash, you could go into
it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash the belt could go
up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your
safety belt properly.

Seats and Restraints

Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats

{ WARNING

Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.

If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition
should use care when using the
seat heater, especially for long
periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as
a blanket, cushion, cover or
similar item. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat.
An overheated seat heater may
cause a burn or may damage
the seat.

2-9

On vehicles with this feature, the
buttons are located on the climate
control panel.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
{ (Ventilated Seat): Press to
ventilate the seat.
A light bar in the climate control
display shows the setting; high,
medium, or low.
Press either button to start that
feature at the highest setting.
Each press of the button, decreases
the setting.
To turn the feature off, press the
button until the light turns off.
The heated or ventilated seats shut
off when the vehicle is turned off.

2-10

Seats and Restraints

Rear Seats
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
The vehicle may have a split folding
rear seat.

Sedan

Wagon

To lower one or both of the rear
seatbacks:

1. Pull forward on the tab, located
on the outboard side of the
seatback, to unlock the
seatback.
2. Fold the seatback down.
This allows access to the trunk.
See Trunk (Sedan) on page 1‑17
for more information.

1. Pull on the lever, located on
the top outboard side of the
seatback, to unlock the
seatback.
2. Fold the seatback down.

Seats and Restraints
To return a seatback to the upright
position:

{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
1. Lift the seatback up and push it
back into place.
2. Make sure the seatback is
locked into place by pushing and
pulling on it.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the
other seatback.
When the seatback is not in use, it
should be kept in the upright, locked
position.

Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You and
your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.

2-11

{ WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 4‑21 for additional
information.

2-12

Seats and Restraints

In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.

A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.

Seats and Restraints

Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

2-13

2-14

Seats and Restraints
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.

A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags,
why should I have to wear
safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and
I never drive far from
home, why should I wear
safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.

Seats and Restraints

How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.

First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.

Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on
page 2‑43 or Infants and Young
Children on page 2‑45. Follow
those rules for everyone's
protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing
safety belts.

2-15

If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.

Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips,
just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt.

2-16

Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING

Q: What is wrong with this?

You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.

A: The lap belt is too loose.
It will not give nearly as much
protection this way.

Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

Q: What is wrong with this?

You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips,
just touching the thighs.

2-17

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.

2-18

Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING

Q: What is wrong with this?

You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.

Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
spleen. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is behind the body.

2-19

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move
too far forward increasing the
chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the
lap belt. The belt force would then
be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.

2-20

Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across
the body.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.

Seats and Restraints

2-21

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment” later in this section
for use and important safety
information.

3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.

To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.

Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 2‑25.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

5. To make the lap part tight,
pull up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.

Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.

2-22

Seats and Restraints

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.

This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if the
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side or
rear crash.

Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.

Push down on the release button (A)
and move the height adjuster to the
desired position. The adjuster can
be moved up by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After the height adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into
position.

Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
They will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash on page 2‑26.

Seats and Restraints
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides

2-23

Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:

This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they
are available through your
dealer/retailer. The guides may
provide added safety belt comfort
for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.

2. Place the guide over the belt
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from
between the edge of the
seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its
storage clip.

2-24

Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.

4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section.
Make sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Pull the
guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto
the clip. Turn the guide and clip
inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body,
leaving only the loop of the elastic
cord exposed.

Seats and Restraints

Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.

The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.

A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.

But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer/retailer will
order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest
coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let
someone else use it, and use it only
for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to
the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.

2-25

Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer/
retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect
you in a crash. They can rip apart
under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 4‑21 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on
page 2‑26.

2-26

Seats and Restraints

Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash

{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.

After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑21.

Seats and Restraints

Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:

All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.

A frontal airbag for the driver.

A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.

A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.

A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.

A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.

With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.

A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.

For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.

2-27

Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑31.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.

2-28

Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.

Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 2‑43 or
Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑45.

Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.

There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for more information.

Seats and Restraints

2-29

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver's frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.

Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.

2-30

Seats and Restraints

Driver Side shown,
Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

WARNING (Continued)

If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
(Continued)

Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.

Seats and Restraints

When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes to
help reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds.
For example:
.

If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.

If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.

If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).

If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.

2-31

Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 2‑27.

2-32

Seats and Restraints

Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not
intended to inflate in rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side
of the vehicle that is struck. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when
either side of the vehicle is struck or
if the sensing system predicts that
the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.

What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.

Seats and Restraints

How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants
can contact the inside of the
vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑31 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.

2-33

What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑32.

2-34

Seats and Restraints

The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when
the airbags inflate. You can lock the
doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for
those features.

In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.

Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.

Seats and Restraints
.

The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 12‑15 and Event Data
Recorders on page 12‑15.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer/retailer
for service.

Passenger Sensing
System

2-35

The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the instrument panel when the
vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. If the
vehicle has remote start, and it is
being used to start the vehicle from
a distance, you may not see the
system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word
ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or
off, will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 4‑22.

United States

The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag,
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and the roof-rail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system.

Canada

2-36

Seats and Restraints

The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.

Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger airbag if:
.

The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.

The system determines an infant
is present in a child restraint.

A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.

Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑22.

The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front
passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active.
For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon
the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in the vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.

2-37

{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑21 for more
information, including important
safety information.

2-38

Seats and Restraints

If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) on page 2‑57 or
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat) on
page 2‑59.

5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under
the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2‑2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child's seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting
in the right front passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could
be because that person is not
sitting properly in the seat.

Seats and Restraints
If this happens, use the following
steps to allow the system to detect
that person and enable the right
front passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.

Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑40 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.

2-39

A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
.

The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger
airbag when liquid is soaked into
the seat. If this happens, the off
indicator will be lit, and the
airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will also be lit.

Liquid pooled on the seat that
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable
(turn on) the passenger airbag
while a child restraint or child
occupant is on the seat. If the
passenger airbag is turned on,
the on indicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for important safety information.

2-40

Seats and Restraints

The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
the seat.

Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about
servicing the vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑12.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.

For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.

Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are
parts of the airbag system in
several places around the vehicle.

Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.

Seats and Restraints
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.

This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑35.
If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 12‑1.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 9‑77 for additional
important information.

2-41

Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 12‑1.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.

2-42

Seats and Restraints

Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑21 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2‑32. See your
dealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash

If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer/retailer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑21 for more information.

A crash can damage the
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may
not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.

Seats and Restraints

Child Restraints
Older Children

Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the below fit test:
.

Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑20 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.

Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions
that come with the booster seat,
state the weight and height
limitations for that booster.

Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of
the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

2-43

Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑20.

2-44

Seats and Restraints

According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.

WARNING (Continued)
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.

In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.

Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
(Continued)

Seats and Restraints

Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)

2-45

WARNING (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.

2-46

Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.

Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.

Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an
infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.

A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.

2-47

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.

2-48

Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.

A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by

Seats and Restraints
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 2‑51 for
more information. Children can be
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.

Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.

Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint

{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.

2-49

Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.

2-50

Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.

WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even
if the airbag is off. If you secure
a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑35 for additional
information.

When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

Seats and Restraints

Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to
attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.

2-51

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).

2-52

Seats and Restraints

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
of the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into
the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.

Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a
top tether, one can be obtained, in
kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor):

Seating
positions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.

Seats and Restraints

To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion. For a wagon
the lower anchors are beneath
zippers, located near the labels.
Open the zippers to access the
lower anchors.

Sedan

2-53

The top tether anchors for a sedan
are located under the tether covers,
on the rear seatback filler panel.
For the wagon, the outboard top
tether anchors are located under the
tether covers behind the rear
seatback. The wagon's center top
tether anchor is under the tether
cover, located on the vehicle floor,
behind the rear seatback. Be sure to
use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.

To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
Wagon

Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 2‑49 for
additional information.

2-54

Seats and Restraints

Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System

{ WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.

{ WARNING

WARNING (Continued)

Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.

belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.

{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
(Continued)

Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.

Seats and Restraints
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:

2-55

2.4. Route, attach and tighten
the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the
cover to open the cover and
expose the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable
head restraint, raise the
head restraint.

1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.

If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.

2-56

Seats and Restraints

If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.

If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.

If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.

Seats and Restraints

Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash

{ WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer/retailer to have
the system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.

2-57

If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑51 for how and
where to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑51 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.

2-58

Seats and Restraints

If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 2‑49.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.

3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.

Seats and Restraints

5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.

2-59

6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑51 for more
information.

Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)

7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.

In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑35 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 4‑22 for more information,
including important safety
information.

To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.

This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑49

2-60

Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
front passenger airbag inflates
and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑35 for additional
information.

If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑51 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 2‑51 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.

Seats and Restraints

2-61

You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when the
vehicle is started. See
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑22.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.

4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.

2-62

Seats and Restraints
If the airbag is off, the off indicator
in the passenger airbag status
indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see
“If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑35 for more
information.

6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.

To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.

Storage

Storage
Compartments

Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . .

3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1

Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Cargo Management System
(Wagon Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Cargo Net (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Convenience Net (Sedan) . . . . . 3-6

Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System (Wagon) . . . 3-6

Instrument Panel Storage
Your vehicle has a storage area
located below the climate control
systems. To access, push on the
cover.

Glove Box
To open, press the button. Use the
key to lock and unlock. The glove
box has a shelf that can be removed
by pulling it out.

3-1

Cupholders
The vehicle has cupholders located
in front of the center console.
Push down on the cover to open.
There are also cupholders in the
rear center armrest. Pull the armrest
down to use.

Center Console Storage
Your vehicle has a center console
with an upper and lower storage
area. To access the upper storage
area, lift the driver side lever on the
front of the console and lift the
cover. To access the lower storage
area, lift the passenger side lever on
the center console. There is an
additional storage area behind the
center console. To access, push the
cover.

3-2

Storage
3. Make sure the cartridge is
properly installed by pulling it
slightly up, it should be firmly
fitted.

Additional Storage
Features
Cargo Cover

4. Grasp the handle and unroll the
cover. Latch the posts into the
sockets on the inside of the
vehicle to secure it.

The cargo cover can be used to
cover items in the cargo area of
the vehicle.

To remove the cargo cover, do the
following:

To install the cargo cover:
1. Hold the cartridge so that the
pull out shade faces backwards.
2. Align the cartridge over the
pin (B) on both sides. Press the
cartridge down and turn it
slightly forward until it clicks.

1. Release the cover from the latch
posts and carefully roll it
back up.
2. Pull the handle (A) back and
remove it from the pin (B) on the
trim panel. Repeat this on the
other side.

Storage

{ WARNING

3-3

Cargo Management
System (Wagon Only)

An improperly stored cargo cover
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be
injured. If the cover is removed,
always store it in the proper
storage location. When it is
replaced, always be sure that it is
securely reattached.
The cover can be opened to
two positions to allow access
to the storage area.
Press on the bottom of load floor
handle assembly to lift the top on
the handle. Pull up on the handle to
open the cargo management
system.

Some items may be stored in the
cargo area when the cover is
closed.

3-4

Storage

Cargo Net (Wagon)

D-Ring Sliders
There are four D-Ring sliders that
move along rails on both sides of
the cargo management area.
These can be used as tie-downs
when storing cargo.

{ WARNING

Installing D-Ring Sliders

The loop of the D-Ring slider must
be facing inward towards the
storage area and the ring must be in
the up position for proper usage.

To install the D-Ring slider (A),
insert it into the channel (B) located
in the middle of each rail.

Push the button to move the D-Ring
slider either towards the front or the
rear of the vehicle. The rings can be
locked into various positions along
the rail.

Do not stack items higher than
the upper end of the cargo net or
hang anything from the net. Avoid
items that have sharp edges or
that apply excessive force to the
net. If items are not properly
stored, damage to the net could
occur and items can be thrown
about the vehicle. You or other
could be injured. Always store
items behind the net.
For vehicles equipped with a cargo
net, it can be used to store light
loads, keeping them from falling
over or being thrown into the cabin
during heavy braking.
The net should not be overloaded or
used to store heavy loads.

Storage

3-5

2. There are four tether positions
for the lower hook straps. In the
front position, the seat backs
should be down for the net to
properly hold items.

4. The net can also be mounted to
the tethers on the back of the
rear seats when the seats are
upright.

1. There are four installation
openings in the roof, two located
in front of and two behind the
rear seats.
Insert the top corners of the
cargo net into the large opening
in the roof and secure by sliding
them into the small opening.

3. Mount the cargo net to the rear
seat tethers located on the front
of the bottom cushions.

3-6

Storage

Convenience Net (Sedan)
Your vehicle may have a
convenience net in the rear of the
vehicle. Put small loads behind the
net. It can also be positioned into an
envelope style to hold smaller items.
The net is not for heavier loads.
Store items as far forward as
you can.

5. Pull on the straps to tighten
the net.
Put light loads behind the net to
keep them from falling over or
being thrown into the cabin
during heavy braking. The net
should not be overloaded or
used to store heavy loads.

Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System
(Wagon)

{ WARNING
If something is carried on
top of the vehicle that is
longer or wider than the roof
rack — like paneling, plywood,
or a mattress — the wind can
catch it while the vehicle is being
driven. The item being carried
could be violently torn off, and
this could cause a collision, and
damage the vehicle. Never carry
something longer or wider than
the roof rack on top of the vehicle
unless using a GM Certified
accessory carrier.

Storage
For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items.
For roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
crossrails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer/retailer
for additional information.
Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle’s center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in
its place.

Installation of Crossrails

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle
capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12.

A. Crossrails

3-7

B. Crossrail End
C. Siderail Cover
1. Siderail covers (C) must be
removed for installing the
crossrails (A).
2. To remove siderail covers, start
at the back of the vehicle and
pull straight up.

3-8

Storage

3. Store the siderail covers in a
place where it can be laid flat.
Do not stack any items on top of
the cover.

4. Identify front and rear crossrail
by the size of the crossrail
support.
5. The front crossrail support (A) is
smaller than the rear crossrail
support (B).

6. The crossrail supports are
labeled with an arrow that needs
to point toward the front of the
vehicle. When the lever on the
crossrail support is in the down
position a pin (A) will be visible
on the bottom of the assembly.
To install the crossrail support,
move the lever into the forward
upper position. The pin (A)
should no longer be visible.

7. Locate the forward or rearward
most cut-out (A) in the siderail
channel.
8. Insert both crossrail ends into
the cut-outs, making sure the
arrows on the crossrail ends are
pointed towards the front of the
vehicle.

Storage
10. Move the levers on both
crossrail supports to the down
position. Slide the crossrail
assembly back and forth until
the crossrail pin engages.
11. Push back and forth again to
make sure the pins have
engaged into the slots.

9. Levers must still be in the
forward up position. For front
crossbar, slide the crossrail
assembly (A) forward until the
crossrail end is past the channel
cut-out area (B). For rear
crossbar, slide the crossrail
assembly (A) rearward until the
entire crossrail support is in
first position to the rear of the
channel cut-out area (B).

Make sure both crossrails are
locked into the same hole
position on each side of the
vehicle.

3-9

Removing the Crossrails
1. Start with either crossrail
assembly, slide both levers into
the upper most position, moving
the lever from the rear to the
front of the vehicle.
2. Slide the crossrail assembly until
it is in the cut-out area or the
siderail channel.
3. Remove the crossrail from the
vehicle.
4. Repeat steps 1–3 for the other
crossrail assembly.
5. Reinstall the siderail covers
making sure they are fully
seated in the siderail channel.

3-10

Storage

2 NOTES

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and
Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4

Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-7
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-8
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boost Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Speed Limiter . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Pressure Gage . . .
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . .
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . .
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light . . . . . .

4-14
4-15
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-23

4-1

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 4-28
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-30
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4-2

Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Messages . . . .
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Messages . . . .
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . .
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . .
Engine Power Messages . . . .
Fuel System Messages . . . . . .

4-36
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-39
4-39
4-40
4-40
4-41
4-42

Key and Lock Messages . . . . .
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System Messages . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Vehicle Messages . . .
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Messages . . . . .
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . .
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . .

4-42
4-44

Vehicle Personalization

4-45

OnStar® System

4-45
4-48

Universal Remote System

4-48
4-48
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-50

Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-51
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Universal Remote System . . . 4-61
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES

4-3

4-4

Instruments and Controls

Instrument Panel Overview

CTS Shown, CTS-V Similar

Instruments and Controls
A. Air Vents on page 7‑6.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑31.
C. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 5‑5.
D. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 5‑4.
E. Instrument Cluster on
page 4‑15.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑8. Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 4‑9
(If Equipped).
G. Navigation Button (If Equipped).
See Navigation System Manual.
H. Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑37. Magnetic Ride
Control on page 8‑40 (CTS-V
Model Only).
I.

Clock on page 4‑12.

J. Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑35.

4-5

K. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 5‑4.

R. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 4‑6.

L. Navigation Display Brightness
Control (If Equipped). See
Navigation System Manual.

S. Horn on page 4‑7.

M. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑9
(Base Audio System) or
Navigation/Radio System
(If Equipped). See Navigation
System Manual.

U. Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 2‑9.

N. Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 8‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 8‑35.

W. Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 8‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 8‑35.

O. Hood on page 9‑5.

X. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 8‑26 or
Manual Transmission on
page 8‑30.

P. Cruise Control on page 8‑41.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Disable Button (CTS-V Model
Only). See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 8‑37.
Q. Tap Shift Controls (CTS-V Model
Only). See Automatic
Transmission on page 8‑26.

T. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑7.

V. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 7‑1.

Y. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 3‑1. Power Outlets on
page 4‑12.
Z. Glove Box on page 3‑1.

4-6

Instruments and Controls
Power Tilt Wheel

Controls
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the
steering wheel be adjusted.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.

The tilt and telescope lever is on the
left side of the steering column.
To tilt and telescope the steering
wheel, pull the lever down. Then
move the steering wheel up or down
or backward or forward into a
comfortable position. Pull the lever
up to lock the steering wheel in
place.

For vehicles with this feature, the
power tilt wheel control is on the left
side of the steering column.
To operate the power tilt feature,
push the control up or down to tilt
the steering wheel up or down.
Push the control forward or
rearward to move the steering wheel
toward the front or rear of the
vehicle.

Instruments and Controls

Steering Wheel Controls

y / c z (Previous/Next):

Press
to go to the previous or next radio
station stored as a favorite, or the
previous or next track of a CD.

For vehicles without a navigation
system, press and hold g for
two seconds to interact with
OnStar® or Bluetooth. See the
OnStar® System on page 4‑59,
or Bluetooth on page 6‑37 for
more information about these
features.

For vehicles with a navigation
system, OnStar, or Bluetooth,
press and hold g for
two seconds and say “hands
free” to interact with OnStar or
Bluetooth. See the OnStar®
System on page 4‑59,
or Bluetooth on page 6‑37 for
more information about these
features.

Press to interact with the Bluetooth®
system. See Bluetooth on
page 6‑37 for more information.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the volume.

Some audio steering wheel controls
could differ depending on the
vehicle's options. Controls that can
be adjusted at the steering wheel
may include:
SRCE (Source): Press to switch
between the radio AM, FM,
XM (if equipped), CD, HDD
(if equipped), auxiliary input jack,
DVD (if equipped), and USB
(if equipped).

b g (Mute/Speech Recognition/
Push to Talk): Press and release
to silence the vehicle speakers only.
The audio of the wireless and wired
headphones, if the vehicle has
these features, does not mute.
Press and release b g again, to
turn the sound on.
.

For vehicles with a navigation
system, press and hold g for
two seconds to initiate speech
recognition. See “Speech
Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more
information.

4-7

Horn
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.

4-8

Instruments and Controls

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on the
right side of the steering column.
Move the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed.
7 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly
move the lever down and release.
Several wipes, hold the lever down.

T (Off):

Turns the wipers off.

& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the
adjustable interval wiper band to set
the frequency of wipes.
Sedan Model shown

6 (Adjustable Interval Wiper
Band): Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
1 : Slow wipes.
2 : Fast wipes.

Wagon Model shown

If the windshield wipers are in use
for about six seconds while you are
driving, the exterior lamps come on
automatically if the exterior lamp
control is in AUTO. See “Wiper
Activated Headlamps” for more
information.

Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. For more
information, see Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 9‑33.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
When using an automatic car wash,
move the windshield wiper lever to
the OFF position. This disables the
windshield wipes and/or rear wipers,
if equipped.
The wiper operations return to
normal when the transmission is no
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle
speed has increased.

Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washer

{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Sedan Model

K (Washer Fluid):

Press the
button with this symbol, on the end
of the windshield washer lever, to
wash the windshield. The washer
fluid sprays onto the windshield and
the wipers run for a few cycles to
clear the windshield. Press and
hold K for more wash cycles.
Wagon Model
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield.
The spray continues until the lever
is released. The wipers will run a
few times.

Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the washer fluid
is low. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑31.
See Washer Fluid on page 9‑25 for
information on filling the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.

4-9

Rear Window
Wiper/Washer
For vehicles with a rear window
wiper/washer, the controls are on
the end of the windshield wiper
lever.

If the headlamps are on while the
windshield is being washed, the
headlamp washers, if the vehicle
has them, will also turn on. See
“Headlamp Washer” following for
more information.

Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the
headlamps and parking lamps after
the windshield wipers have been in
use for about six seconds. For this
feature to work, the exterior lamp
control must be in AUTO.
The wiper-activated headlamps
immediately turn off, when the
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF or
the windshield wiper control is
turned off.

Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
The system turns off when the
button is returned to the middle
position.

4-10

Instruments and Controls

Z (Rear Wiper Delay Short):
Sets a five second delay between
wipes.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay Long):

Sets
a ten second delay between wipes.

Headlamp Washer
For vehicles with headlamp washers
they clear debris from the headlamp
lenses.

= (Rear Washer): Push the
windshield wiper lever forward to
spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever returns to its
starting position when released.

The headlamps must be on to be
washed. If the headlamps are off,
only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed.
If the washer fluid is low, the
headlamp washers will not work.

The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the rear
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑25.

{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.

Press the washer button at the end
of the windshield wiper lever, to
wash the headlamps. Both the
headlamps and the windshield will
be washed. After the first wash, the
headlamps will not be washed until
the fifth press of the windshield
washer button.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑8 for more information.
The headlamp washers are beneath
the headlamps.

Instruments and Controls

4-11

Compass

Compass Calibration

The vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).

The compass can be manually
calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires,
manhole covers, or other industrial
structures, if possible.

Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight. If you
do not live in zone eight or drive out
of the area, the variance needs to
be changed to the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance, use
the following procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving. On
an automatic transmission
vehicle, only set it when the
vehicle is in P (Park). On a
manual transmission vehicle,
only set it when the vehicle is
stopped.
Press the vehicle information
button until Press To Change
Compass Zone displays.

2. Find the vehicle's current
location and variance zone
number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are
available.
3. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through and select the
appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until
the vehicle heading, for
example, N for North, is
displayed in the DIC.
5. Calibrate the compass. See
“Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.

If CAL appears in the DIC display,
the compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a
heading, for example, N for North,
or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a
strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off
the vehicle, move the magnetic
item, then turn on the vehicle and
calibrate the compass.

4-12

Instruments and Controls

To calibrate the compass, use the
following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass,
check that the compass is set to
the correct variance zone. See
“Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure” earlier in this
section.
Do not operate any switches
such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, seats, etc.
during the calibration procedure.

4. The DIC will display Calibrating
Drive In Circles. Drive the
vehicle in tight circles at less
than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete
the calibration. The DIC will
display Calibration Complete for
a few seconds when the
calibration is complete. The DIC
display will then return to Press
To Calibrate Compass.

Clock

2. Press the vehicle information
button until Press To Calibrate
Compass displays.

The analog clock is located on the
instrument panel above the radio.
The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by
itself. To adjust the clock:

3. Press the set/reset button to
start the compass calibration.

1. Locate the adjustment buttons
directly below the clock face.
2. Push and hold the right
adjustment button to move the
clock hands forward or the left
adjustment button to make the
clock hands go backward.

Holding either button down will
cause the clock to advance
faster. Release the button before
the desired time is reached.
3. Push and release either button
to adjust the time by one minute
increments until the desired time
is reached.

Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be
used to connect auxiliary electrical
equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
There are three accessory power
outlets. There is an outlet located in
the front storage area below the
climate control system, one inside
the center console storage bin, and
one on the rear of the center
console.
For CTS Wagon model only, there is
an additional accessory power
outlet located near the rear
cargo net.

Instruments and Controls
To use an outlet, remove the
protective cap. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the
protective cap. The accessory
power outlet is operational at all
times.
Notice: If electrical devices are
left plugged into a power outlet,
the battery may drain causing the
vehicle not to start or damage to
the battery. This would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always unplug all electrical
devices when turning off the
vehicle.
Certain electrical accessories may
not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
result in blown vehicle or adapter
fuses. If you experience a problem
see your dealer/retailer for
additional information on accessory
power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power
outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.

4-13

Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have a cigarette
lighter. To use the lighter, push it in
all the way and let go. When it is
ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.

4-14

Instruments and Controls

Ashtrays
The vehicle may have two
removable ashtrays. One ashtray
can be placed into the instrument
panel storage compartment and the
other into the center console rear
compartment.
To empty the ashtrays, hold on to
the edges of the bin and pull straight
out. To reinstall, push the tray back
into place.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in the
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,
Gages, and Indicators
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gages and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.

Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster

United States Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Canada and Manual Similar

4-15

4-16

Instruments and Controls

United States V-Series Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Canada and Manual Similar

Instruments and Controls

Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles per
hour (mph).

Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
If this vehicle has to have a new
odometer installed, the new one
may read the correct mileage. This
is because the vehicle computer
has stored the mileage in memory.

Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the
number of miles or kilometers
traveled for up to two trips.
The trip odometer is part of the
Driver Information Center (DIC),
for more information see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31.

For vehicles that have the
navigation system, see your
Navigation System manual for
more information.

4-17

Fuel Gage

Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
The CTS-V tachometer has tracer
lights that follow the movement of
the tachometer indicator. The tracer
lights also flash when it is time to
up-shift to avoid the engine speed
limit. See Automatic Transmission
on page 8‑26 or Manual
Transmission on page 8‑30 for
more information.

When the ignition is on, the fuel
gage tells you about how much fuel
you have left in your tank.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates
the side of the vehicle the fuel door
is on.
When the indicator nears empty, the
low fuel light comes on. There is still
a little fuel left in the vehicle, but the
fuel tank should be filled soon.

4-18

Instruments and Controls

The Fuel Level Low message
appears in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and a single chime
sounds. See Fuel System
Messages on page 4‑42 for more
information.
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with your fuel gage:
.

At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gage
reads full.

It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gage indicated.
For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more
or less than half the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.

The gage moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.

The gage takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and will go back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.

Boost Gage

Canada
For the CTS-V, this gage is located
in the instrument panel cluster.

United States

This gage indicates positive
manifold pressure which is the
induction air pressure level in the
intake manifold before it enters the
combustion chamber. This gage
reads zero under light throttle before
boost is generated.
This gage automatically resets to
zero every time the engine is
started.

Instruments and Controls

Engine Speed Limiter

4-19

Engine Oil Pressure Gage

This feature prevents the engine
speed from reaching an unsafe
level. If the level is too high, the
throttle closes or limits the fuel
supply until the engine speed
returns to a safe level. Throttle
operation and fuel supply returns to
normal when engine speed is
lowered.
For the CTS-V, the tachometer
tracer lights flashes prior to reaching
engine speed limit. The tracer lights
also flash on automatic transmission
vehicles while in the DSC or Tap
Shift modes.

Canada
United States

For vehicles with an engine oil
pressure gage. It shows the engine
oil pressure in psi (pounds per
square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature and oil
viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil
pressure light will come on. See
Engine Oil Pressure Light on
page 4‑30 for more information.

4-20

Instruments and Controls

A reading outside the normal
operating range may be caused by
a dangerously low oil level or some
other problem causing low oil
pressure. Oil should be checked as
soon as possible. See Oil Pressure
Low Stop Engine under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 and Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.

Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage

{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.

Canada
United States

This gage shows the engine coolant
temperature. If the engine coolant
overheats the engine coolant
temperature warning light will come
on. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on
page 4‑29 and Engine Overheating
on page 9‑23 for more information.

Instruments and Controls

Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light

Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light

There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
When the engine is started this light
and the chime comes on and stays
on for several seconds to remind
the passenger to fasten their safety
belt. The light also begins to flash.
When the engine is started this light
and a chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind
drivers to fasten their safety belts.
The light also begins to flash.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
come on.

This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.

4-21

The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.

Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
page 2‑27.

4-22

Instruments and Controls

Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator

The airbag readiness light comes on
and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started. Then
the light goes out.

The vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑35 for
important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.

{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light the words ON and OFF,
or the symbols for on and off, for
several seconds as a system check.
If the vehicle has remote start, and it
is being used to start the vehicle
from a distance, you may not see
the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol, to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.

Instruments and Controls
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer/retailer for service.

Charging System Light

4-23

If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned on
but the engine is not running, as a
check to show the light is working.
It should go out when the engine is
started.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) also
displays a message.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 4‑37.

A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.

4-24

Instruments and Controls

If the check engine light comes on
and stays on, while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications
on page 9‑3.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.

The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
.

Reduce vehicle speed.

Avoid hard accelerations.

Avoid steep uphill grades.

If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.

Instruments and Controls
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected.
.

Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 8‑52. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A
few driving trips should turn the
light off.

Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Specifications on
page 8‑50.

If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer/retailer
can check the vehicle. The
dealer/retailer has the proper test
equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have
developed.

4-25

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
.

The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine
running, or if the ignition is
placed in ON/RUN and the light
is not on.

4-26
.

Instruments and Controls

The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission
control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.

Brake System
Warning Light

When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will also come
on when the parking brake is set.

This vehicle's hydraulic brake
system is divided into two parts.
If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop the
vehicle. For good braking both parts
need to be working well.

The light will flash or stay on if the
parking brake is not fully released.

If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.

United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly
when the ignition is placed in
ON/RUN. If it does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn if there is a problem.

If the light stays on after the parking
brake is fully released there is a
base brake problem.

{ CAUTION
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.

Instruments and Controls
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), this red brake warning
light comes on when the park brake
is applied. If the light continues
flashing after the park brake is
released, or while driving, there is a
problem with the Electric Parking
Brake system.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see you
dealer/retailer.

does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is
a problem.
If this park brake light comes on
there is a problem with a system on
the vehicle that is causing the park
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be driven,
but should be taken to a dealer/
retailer
See Brake Assist (Except CTS-V)
on page 8‑37 for more information.

4-27

Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.

For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), this park brake status
light should come on briefly when
ignition is placed in ON/RUN. If it

If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it
is safely possible and turn the
ignition off. A chime may also sound
when the light comes on steady.

4-28

Instruments and Controls

Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the ABS light stays
on, or comes on again while driving,
the vehicle needs service. If the
regular brake system warning light
is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑26.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for all brake related DIC
messages.

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shift
light, it shows when to shift to the
next higher gear for best fuel
economy.
See Manual Transmission on
page 8‑30 for more information.
For the CTS-V, the tracer lights
function as a performance up-shift
light.
These tracers flash to indicate when
to shift to the next higher gear to
avoid the engine speed limit. See
Automatic Transmission on
page 8‑26 or Manual Transmission
on page 8‑30 for more information.

Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light
should come on briefly when the
engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on or stays on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the TCS/StabiliTrak
and the vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the
system does not limit wheel spin.
Adjust driving accordingly.

Instruments and Controls
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑37 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑38 for more
information.

Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light

The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on
while driving, the vehicle may have
a problem with the cooling system.

4-29

Stop the vehicle and turn off the
engine to avoid damage to the
engine. A warning chime sounds
when this light is on.

When the Light is On Steady

See Engine Overheating on
page 9‑23 for more information.

A tire pressure message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 4‑48 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the tire
loading information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66 for more
information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a tire pressure
monitoring system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.

This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.

When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9‑69 for more
information.

4-30

Instruments and Controls

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Security Light

The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer/retailer.

This light flashes when the security
system is activated.
For more information, see Vehicle
Security on page 1‑23.

High-Beam on Light

The high-beam on light comes on
when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 5‑2 for more
information.

Instruments and Controls

Fog Lamp Light

Cruise Control Light

4-31

Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)

The fog lamp light comes on when
the fog lamps are in use.

This light comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 5‑5 for more
information.

The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑41 for more
information.

Lamps on Reminder

This light comes on when the
taillamps are on.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)
gives you the status of many of your
vehicle's systems. The DIC is also
used to display warning/status
messages. All messages appear in
the DIC display located at the
bottom of the instrument panel
cluster. The DIC buttons are located
on the instrument panel, next to the
steering wheel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
displays the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display
shows the DIC information. The
bottom line of the DIC display
shows the compass. The compass
displays in the trip/fuel menus and
in some vehicle information menus.

4-32

Instruments and Controls

If a problem is detected, a warning
message appears on the display.
Take any message that appears on
the display seriously and remember
that clearing the message only
makes the message disappear, and
does not correct the problem.

DIC Operation and Displays

3 (Trip/Fuel):

Press this button
to scroll through the trip and fuel
displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display
Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.

y z (Menu Up/Down): Press this
button to scroll up and down the
menu items.

T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to scroll through the
vehicle information displays. See
“Vehicle Information Display Menu
Items” following for more information
on these displays.

The following
display menu items can be
displayed by pressing the trip/fuel
button:

U (Customization):

Press this
button to scroll through each of the
customization features. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51 for
more information on the
customization features.

V (Set/Reset):
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
has different displays which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC
buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.

Press this button to
reset certain DIC features and to
acknowledge DIC warning
messages and clear them from the
DIC display.

Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel):

Odometer
This display shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Trip A or Trip B
These displays show the current
distance traveled since the last
reset for each trip odometer in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both
odometers can be used at the same
time. Each trip odometer can be
reset to zero separately by pressing
and holding the set/reset button for
a few seconds while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.

Instruments and Controls
Fuel Range

AVG (Average) Economy

This display shows the approximate
number of remaining miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This
estimate is based on the current
driving conditions and changes if
the driving conditions change. For
example, if you are driving in traffic
and making frequent stops, the
display may read one number, but if
you enter the freeway, the number
may change even though you still
have the same amount of fuel in the
fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel
economy than city driving.

This display shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on
the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this
display was reset. To reset this
display to zero, press the set/reset
button.

Once the range drops below about
30 miles (48 km) remaining, the
display shows Low Range.
If the vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel
Level Low message displays. See
“Fuel Level Low” under Fuel System
Messages on page 4‑42 for more
information.

Timer
This display can be used like a
stopwatch. You can record the time
it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press
the trip/fuel button until Timer
00:00:00 displays.
To turn on the timer, press the
set/reset button until the timer
starts.
To turn off the timer, press the
set/reset button again. The timer
stops and displays the end timing
value.

4-33

To reset the timer to zero, press and
hold the set/reset button after the
timer has been stopped.
Inst (Instantaneous) Economy
This display shows the current fuel
economy in either miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number reflects only the fuel
economy that the vehicle has right
now and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. Unlike
average economy, this display
cannot be reset.
AVG (Average) Speed
This display shows the average
speed of the vehicle in either miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this display. To reset
this display to zero, press the
set/reset button.

4-34

Instruments and Controls

Speedometer
This display shows a digital
speedometer in the DIC. The speed
displays in either miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). To change the units
from English to metric, see “Units”
later in this section.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information Display
Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): The
following display menu items can be
displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:
Oil Life Remaining
If the vehicle has this display, it
shows the estimated oil life
remaining. If you see 99% Oil Life
Remaining on the display, that
means that 99% of the current oil
life remains.

When the oil life is depleted, the
Change Engine Oil Soon message
appears on the display. You should
change the oil as soon as possible.
In addition to the engine oil life
system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑3 and Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.
The Oil Life must be reset after
each oil change. It does not reset
itself. Avoid accidental resetting of
the Oil Life system. It cannot be
reset accurately until the next oil
change. To reset the engine oil life
system, See Engine Oil Life System
on page 9‑12. The display shows
100% when the system is reset.
Units
This display allows you to select
between English or Metric units of
measurement. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select
between English or Metric units.

Parking Assist
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this display allows the system to be
turned on or off. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to
select between On or Off. The
URPA system automatically turns
back on after each vehicle start.
When the URPA system is turned
off and the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park), the DIC displays the
Parking Assist Off message as a
reminder that the system has been
turned off. See Object Detection
System Messages on page 4‑45
and Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 8‑44 for more information.
Tire Pressure
The pressure for each tire can
be viewed in the DIC. The tire
pressure is shown in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle
information button until the DIC
displays Front Tire PSI (kPa) Left ##
Right ##. Press the vehicle

Instruments and Controls
information button again until the
DIC displays Rear Tire PSI (kPa)
Left ## Right ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is
detected by the system while
driving, a message advising you to
add air to a specific tire appears in
the display. See Tire Pressure on
page 9‑66 and Tire Messages on
page 4‑48 for more information.
Battery Voltage
This display shows the current
battery voltage. The vehicle's
charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery.
The battery voltage may fluctuate
when viewing this information on the
DIC. This is normal.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, the charging
system light illuminates and/or the
DIC displays a message. See
Charging System Light on
page 4‑23, Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages on page 4‑37
and Battery Load Management on
page 5‑6 for more information.

Calibrate Compass
The vehicle may have this feature.
The compass can be manually
calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see “DIC
Compass” later in this section.
Change Compass Zone
The vehicle may have this feature.
To change the compass zone
through the DIC, see “DIC
Compass” later in this section.
Relearn Remote Key
If the vehicle has the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) system, this
display allows you to match the
transmitter to the vehicle. This
procedure will erase all previously
learned transmitters. Therefore, they
must be relearned as additional
transmitters.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, see the Keyless
Access information for Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry

4-35

(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for
instructions on matching a keyless
access transmitter to the vehicle.
To match an RKE transmitter to the
vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information
button until Press To Relearn
Remote Key displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until
Remote Key Learning Active is
displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and
unlock buttons on the first
transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall
seats, the first transmitter
learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime sounds indicating that
the transmitter is matched.

4-36

Instruments and Controls

4. To learn additional transmitters
at this time, repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a
maximum of eight learned
transmitters.
5. To exit the programming mode,
you must cycle the key to
LOCK/OFF.

Lateral Acceleration (CTS-V Only)
Lateral acceleration is a measure of
how hard you are taking a corner.
For example, when you are turning
right you will feel your body push to
the left. This force is measured in a
"g". This gage will display from
0.0 g to 2.0 g.

Trans (Transmission) Temp
(Temperature) (CTS-V Only)

Blank Display

This display shows the transmission
fluid temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C).

DIC Compass

Oil Pressure (CTS-V Only)
This display shows the oil pressure
in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).

This display shows no information.
The vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Compass on page 4‑11 for
information.

Vehicle Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status of
the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the
driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one
after another.
Some messages may not require
immediate action, but you can
press V (Set/Reset) to
acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from
the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared
from the DIC display because they
are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem.

Instruments and Controls
The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed
and some information about them.

pressing the vehicle information
button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.

Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages

Battery Volts Low

Battery Saver Active
This message displays when the
system detects that the battery
voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system
starts reducing certain features of
the vehicle that you may be able to
notice. At the point that the features
are disabled, this message is
displayed. It means that the vehicle
is trying to save the charge in the
battery.
Turn off all unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor
battery voltage on the DIC by

This message displays when the
electrical system is charging less
than 10 volts or the battery has
been drained.
If this message appears
immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the
generator can still recharge the
battery. The battery should recharge
while driving, but may take a few
hours to do so. Consider using an
auxiliary charger to boost the
battery after returning home or to a
final destination. Make sure you
follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
If this message appears while
driving or after starting the vehicle
and stays on, have it checked
immediately to determine the cause
of this problem.

4-37

To help the generator recharge the
battery quickly, you can reduce the
load on the electrical system by
turning off the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor
battery voltage on the DIC by
pressing the vehicle information
button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.

Service Battery Charging
System
This message displays when there
is a problem with the generator and
battery charging systems. Driving
with this problem could drain the
battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Have the electrical system
checked by your dealer/retailer.
Under certain conditions, the
charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster.
See Charging System Light on
page 4‑23 for more information.

4-38

Instruments and Controls

Brake System Messages
Park Brake Released

Press Brake To Start Engine
(Automatic Transmission Only)

For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays when the parking brake
has been released from the set
position. See the Electric Parking
Brake information under Parking
Brake (Manual) on page 8‑34 or
Parking Brake (Electric) on
page 8‑35 for more information.

If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays if you try to start the engine
without having the brake pressed.
The brake needs to be pressed
when starting the engine. See
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on
page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 8‑19 for
more information.

Park Brake Set

Release Park Brake Switch

For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays when the parking brake
has been applied to the set position.
See the Electric Parking Brake
information under Parking Brake
(Manual) on page 8‑34 or Parking
Brake (Electric) on page 8‑35 for
more information.

For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays if the Park Brake switch is
pulled while the vehicle is moving.
See the Electric Parking Brake
information under Parking Brake
(Manual) on page 8‑34 or Parking
Brake (Electric) on page 8‑35 for
more information.

Service Brake Assist
This message displays if there is a
problem with the brake system. The
brake system warning light and the
antilock brake system (ABS)
warning light may also display on
the instrument panel cluster. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 4‑26 and Antilock Brake
System (ABS) Warning Light on
page 4‑27 for more information.
Stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the
DIC display. If the message displays
immediately or again after you begin
driving, the brake system needs
service. See your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) on page 8‑33
for more information.

Service Brake System
This message displays, while the
ignition is on, when the brake fluid
level is low. The brake system
warning light on the instrument
panel cluster also comes on. See

Instruments and Controls
Brake System Warning Light on
page 4‑26 for more information.
This message may also be
displayed for other brake system
problems. Have the brake system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.

Service Park Brake
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays if a problem is detected
with the electric parking brake
system. See your dealer/retailer for
service.

Step On Brake To Release
Park Brake
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays if you try to release the
park brake system without first
pressing the brake pedal. See the
Electric Parking Brake information
under Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 8‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 8‑35 for more
information.

4-39

Compass Messages

Door Ajar Messages

Calibrating Drive In Circles

Driver Door Open

This message displays when
calibrating the compass. Drive the
vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph
(8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
See “DIC Compass” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for more information.

This message displays when the
driver door is not closed completely.
Close the door completely.

Calibration Complete
This message displays when the
compass calibration is complete.
See “DIC Compass” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for more information.

Cruise Control Messages
Cruise Set To XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays whenever
the cruise control is set. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑41 for more
information.

Hood Open
This message displays when the
hood is not closed completely. Make
sure that the hood is closed
completely.

Left Rear Door Open
This message displays when the
driver side rear door is not closed
completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.

Passenger Door Open
This message displays when the
passenger side front door is not
closed completely. Make sure that
the door is closed completely.

4-40

Instruments and Controls

Rear Access Open (Wagon)
This message displays when the
liftgate is not closed completely.
Make sure that the liftgate is closed
completely.

Right Rear Door Open
This message displays when the
passenger side rear door is not
closed completely. Make sure that
the door is closed completely.

Trunk Open (Sedan)
This message displays when the
trunk is not closed completely. Make
sure that the trunk is closed
completely.

Engine Cooling System
Messages
Engine Hot A/C (Air
Conditioning) Off
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.

See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 4‑20. To avoid
added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When the
coolant temperature returns to
normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive the vehicle.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.

Engine Overheated Idle Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do
not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed. See
Engine Overheating on page 9‑23
for more information.

This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. If the
message does not clear in a few
minutes or if the overheat light stays
on, shut the vehicle off and have it
serviced before driving again. See
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 4‑29.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 9‑24 for
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.

Engine Oil Messages
Change Engine Oil Soon
When this message displays, it
means that service is required for
the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑3 and Engine Oil on
page 9‑10 for more information.

Instruments and Controls
When you reset the Change Engine
Oil Soon message by clearing it
from the display, you still must reset
the engine oil life system separately.
For more information on resetting
the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on
page 9‑12.

Engine Oil Low Add Oil
If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,
this message displays if the oil level
in the vehicle is low. Check the oil
level and correct it as necessary.
You may need to let the vehicle cool
or warm up and cycle the ignition to
be sure this message clears.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds, until the next ignition
cycle. See Engine Oil on page 9‑10
for additional information.

4-41

Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine

Engine Power Messages

Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine oil pressure is
low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil
pressure is corrected. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10 for more
information.

Engine Power Is Reduced

This message displays when the
vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
The oil pressure light may also
appear on the instrument panel
cluster. See Engine Oil Pressure
Light on page 4‑30. See Engine Oil
on page 9‑10 for more information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as
engine damage can result from
driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible when this message is
displayed.

This message displays when the
engine power is being reduced to
protect the engine from damage.
There could be several malfunctions
that might cause this message.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.

4-42

Instruments and Controls

Fuel System Messages

Electronic Key Already Known

Fuel Level Low

If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays if you try to match a
transmitter that has already been
learned. See the Keyless Access
information for Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 1‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 1‑7 for more information.

This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel
tank as soon as possible. A chime
may sound when this message
displays. See Filling the Tank on
page 8‑52.

Tighten Gas Cap
This message displays when the
fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to
ensure that it is on and tightened
properly.

Key and Lock Messages
Accessory Mode Active
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when the accessory mode
is active. See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 8‑18 or Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 8‑19 for more information.

devices are cell phones and cell
phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items.
Try moving the keyless access
transmitter away from these
devices when starting the
vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate
openers may also generate
Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with the
keyless access transmitter. Do
not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or
bag as these devices.

Electronic Key Not Detected
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays if the vehicle does not
detect the presence of a transmitter
when you have attempted to start
the vehicle or a vehicle door has
just closed. The following conditions
may cause this message to appear:
.

Driver-added equipment plugged
into the accessory power outlet
on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these

The vehicle is experiencing
Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI). Some locations, such as
airports, automatic toll booths,
and some gas stations have EMI
fields which may interfere with
the keyless access transmitter.

Instruments and Controls

If moving the transmitter to
different locations within the
vehicle does not help, place the
transmitter in the center console
transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing the front of the
vehicle and then start the
vehicle.
.

The vehicle's battery voltage is
low. The battery voltage must be
above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be
detected properly.

4-43

Electronic Key Not Detected
Restart Allowed

Learn Delay Active Wait
XX Min (Minutes)

If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when the keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the
vehicle while you are trying to turn
the ignition off. The vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal
causing the keyless access system
to be jammed. If you have the
keyless access transmitter with you,
get out of the vehicle and lock the
doors. If you do not have the
keyless access transmitter with you,
you will be able to start the vehicle
again within five minutes, or until the
vehicle's content theft deterrent
system is armed. See Starting the
Engine on page 8‑20 for more
information.

If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for more
information.

Maximum # Electronic Keys
Learned
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when the maximum
number of transmitters have been
learned. See the Keyless Access
information for Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 1‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 1‑7 for more information.

4-44

Instruments and Controls

Press Start Control To
Learn Keys
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for more
information.

Ready To Learn
Electronic Key # X
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays while matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for more
information.

Remote Key Learning Active

Rotate Control To Off Position

If the vehicle has the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) system, this
message displays while matching
new transmitters to the vehicle. See
“Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle” under the Key Access
information for Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 1‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 1‑7 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑31 for
more information.

If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY and the shift
lever has just been moved to
P (Park). The message displays as
a reminder to turn the ignition off. To
avoid draining the battery, make
sure the ignition is turned off before
leaving the vehicle.

Replace Battery In Remote Key
This message displays when the
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) or keyless access transmitter
needs to be replaced. To replace
the battery, see “Battery
Replacement” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7.

Service Keyless Start System
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when there is a problem
with this feature. See your dealer/
retailer.

Lamp Messages
AFL (Adaptive Forward
Lighting) Lamps Need Service
This message displays when the
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer/retailer.

Instruments and Controls

4-45

See Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) on page 5‑4 for more
information.

Object Detection System
Messages

Ride Control System
Messages

Automatic Light Control Off

Parking Assist Off

All Wheel Drive Off

This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned off.

If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
after the vehicle has been started,
this message displays to remind the
driver that the URPA system has
been turned off. Press the set/reset
button to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display. To
turn the URPA system back on, see
“Parking Assist” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31. See Ultrasonic Parking
Assist on page 8‑44 for more
information.

If the vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays when there is a temporary
condition making the AWD system
unavailable. The vehicle will run in
2WD. This could be caused by:

Automatic Light Control On
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned on.

Turn Signal On
This message displays as a
reminder to turn off the turn signal if
you drive the vehicle for more than
about 1.6 km (1 mile) with a turn
signal on. A multiple chime sounds
when this message displays.

Loss of wheel or vehicle speed

AWD system overheat

Certain vehicle electrical
conditions

Service Parking Assist

This message turns off when the
above conditions are no longer
present and by resetting the
warning message.

If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. See
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 8‑44 for more information.
See your dealer/retailer for service.

To reset the warning message, turn
the ignition off and then back on
again after 30 seconds. If the
message stays on, see your dealer/
retailer right away. See All-Wheel
Drive on page 8‑32 for more
information.

4-46

Instruments and Controls

Service All Wheel Drive
This message displays if a problem
occurs with the All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) system. The vehicle will run
in 2WD. This could be caused by:

notice that the effort required to
steer the vehicle increases or feels
heavier, but you will still be able to
steer the vehicle. See Steering on
page 8‑5.

An electronics problem

Service Stabilitrak

An AWD system oil overheat

Worn out or overheated clutch
plates

This message displays if there has
been a problem detected with the
StabiliTrak® system. The TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light on the
instrument panel cluster also
comes on.

Various electrical issues

If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the system
needs service. See your dealer/
retailer right away.

Service Power Steering
This message displays if a problem
is detected with the speed variable
assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may

If this message comes on while you
are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the
ignition off then back on. If this
message still stays on or comes
back on again while you are driving,
the vehicle needs service. Have the
StabiliTrak system inspected by
your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible. See StabiliTrak System on
page 8‑38 for more information.

Service Suspension System
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Magnetic Ride
Control system. See Magnetic Ride
Control on page 8‑40 for more
information. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.

Service Traction Control
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). The TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light on the
instrument panel cluster also comes
on. When this message displays,
the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
your dealer/retailer for service. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 8‑37 for more information.

Stabilitrak Competitive Mode
This message displays when the
Competitive Driving mode is
selected. When in this mode, the
Traction Control System (TCS) will
not be operating and the TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light will turn on.

Instruments and Controls
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
“Competitive Driving Mode” under
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 8‑37 for more information.

Stabilitrak Not Ready
This message may display after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding
30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
on the instrument panel cluster also
comes on. The StabiliTrak system is
not functional until the message has
turned off. See StabiliTrak System
on page 8‑38 for more information.

on. To turn the StabiliTrak system
on or off, see StabiliTrak System on
page 8‑38.
There are several conditions that
can cause this message to appear.
.

The message also displays if the
brake system warning light is on.
See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑26.

The message could display if the
stability system takes longer
than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving
conditions.

Stabilitrak Off
This message displays when you
turn off StabiliTrak, or when the
stability control has been
automatically disabled. The TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light on the
instrument panel cluster also
comes on.
To realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you
should normally leave StabiliTrak

One condition is overheating,
which could occur if StabiliTrak
activates continuously for an
extended period of time.

The message displays if an
engine or vehicle related
problem has been detected and
the vehicle needs service. See
your dealer/retailer.

4-47

The message turns off as soon as
the conditions that caused the
message to be displayed are no
longer present.

Suspension Mode Sport
(CTS-V Only)
This message will be displayed
when sport mode is selected using
the Magnetic Ride Control button in
the center of the instrument panel.
See Magnetic Ride Control on
page 8‑40 for more information.

Suspension Mode Tour
(CTS-V Only)
This message will be displayed
when touring mode is selected
using the Magnetic Ride Control
button in the center of the
instrument panel. See Magnetic
Ride Control on page 8‑40 for more
information.

4-48

Instruments and Controls

Airbag System Messages
Service Air Bag
This message displays when there
is a problem with the airbag system.
Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑21 for more information.

Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
Service Theft Deterrent System
This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the
system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not
protecting the vehicle. The vehicle
usually restarts; however, you may
want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the
engine. See Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) on page 1‑24 or

Immobilizer Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑25 for more
information.

Start Aborted By Theft
Deterrent
This message displays if there is a
communication problem between
the keyless access system and the
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be
started when this message displays.
See your dealer/retailer for service.

Theft Attempted
This message displays if the
theft-deterrent system has detected
a break-in attempt while you were
away from the vehicle. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 1‑23 for more information.

Service Vehicle Messages
Service A/C System
This message displays when the
electronic sensors that control the
air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.

Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if
you notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.

Service Vehicle Soon
This message displays when a
non-emissions related malfunction
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.

Tire Messages
Service Tire Monitor System
This message displays if a part on
the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is not working properly. The
tire pressure light also flashes and
then remains on during the same
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 4‑29. Several
conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑69 for
more information. If the warning

Instruments and Controls
comes on and stays on, there may
be a problem with the TPMS. See
your dealer/retailer.

The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑29.

Tire Learning Active

If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on
page 9‑58, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12, and Tire Pressure on
page 9‑66.

This message displays when the
Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is re-learning the tire
positions on the vehicle. The tire
positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a
tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on
page 9‑73, Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 9‑68, and Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66 for more
information.

Tire Low Add Air To Tire
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle’s tires is low. This message
also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT
REAR to indicate the location of the
low tire.

If the vehicle does not have a spare
tire, the message will display “Use
Inflator Kit in Trunk”. Use the inflator
kit to inflate the tires to the correct
pressure. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 9‑84 for
more information.
More than one tire pressure
message can be received at a time.
To read the other messages, press
the set/reset button.
The DIC display also shows the tire
pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31.

4-49

Transmission Messages
Differential Hot, Reduce Speed
(CTS-V Only)
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the differential fluid
temperature exceeds 150°C
(300°F). Driving aggressively or at
high speeds can cause the
differential fluid temperature to be
higher than normal. If this message
appears, you may continue to drive
at a slower speed. If you have been
operating the vehicle under normal
driving conditions, the vehicle may
need service. See your dealer/
retailer for an inspection.
To acknowledge the message,
press V . The message reappears
and a chime sounds every
two minutes until this condition
changes. If you do not clear the
message, it will remain on until the
condition changes.

4-50

Instruments and Controls

Service Transmission

Sport Mode

This message displays when there
is a problem with the vehicle's
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.

This message displays when the
vehicle is in sport mode. The
transmission gear position will also
be displayed when DSC is in use.
See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)”
under Automatic Transmission on
page 8‑26 for more information.

Shift To Park (Automatic
Transmission Only)
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays if the vehicle is not in
P (Park) while the engine is being
turned off. The vehicle will be in
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shift
lever is moved to P (Park), the
ignition needs to be turned off. If the
ignition is not turned off, the vehicle
will remain in ACC/ACCESSORY.
To avoid draining the battery, turn
the ignition to off before leaving the
vehicle.

Transmission Hot Idle Engine
This message displays when the
transmission fluid in the vehicle is
too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it
to idle until the transmission cools
down or until this message is
removed.

Vehicle Speed Messages
Ice Possible Drive With Care
This message displays when the
outside temperature is cold enough
to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.

Speed Limited To
XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when the
vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph
(128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed
variable assist steering, magnetic
ride control, or automatic leveling
control systems. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.

Washer Fluid Messages
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on windshield washer
fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible.
See Washer Fluid on page 9‑25 for
more information.

Instruments and Controls

Vehicle
Personalization

2. Press the customization
button to enter the feature
settings menu.

Vehicle customization allows certain
features to be programmed for one
preferred setting.

Feature Settings Menu Items

Only the customization options
available will be displayed on
the DIC.
The default settings were preset
when the vehicle left the factory, but
may have been changed.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.

The following are customization
features that allow you to program
settings to the vehicle:
Display In English
This feature will only display if a
language other than English has
been set. This feature allows for
changing the language of the DIC
messages back to English.

Entering the Feature
Settings Menu

Press the customization button until
the Press V To Display In English
screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to
select English as the language in
which all DIC messages will appear.

1. Turn the ignition on.

Display Language

To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.

To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.

This feature allows you to select the
language in which the DIC
messages will appear.

4-51

Press the customization button until
the Display Language screen
appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
English (default): All messages
will appear in English.
Deutsch: All messages will appear
in German.
Italiano: All messages will appear
in Italian.
Francais: All messages will appear
in French.
Espanol: All messages will appear
in Spanish.
Portugese: All messages will
appear in Portugese.
Arabic: All messages will appear in
Arabic.
Chinese: All messages will appear
in Chinese.
Japanese: All messages will
appear in Japanese.

4-52

Instruments and Controls

No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Auto Door Lock

At Vehicle Speed (default on
Manual Transmission): The
vehicle's doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above
5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.

This feature allows you to select
when the vehicle's doors will
automatically lock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 1‑15 for more
information.

To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

Press the customization button until
Auto Door Lock appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu
up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:

This feature allows you to select
whether or not the door(s) will
automatically unlock. It also allows
you to select which doors and when
they will automatically unlock. See
Automatic Door Locks on
page 1‑15 for more information.

Shift Out Of Park (default on
Automatic Transmission)
(Automatic Transmission Only):
The vehicle's doors automatically
lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

Auto Door Unlock

Press the customization button until
Auto Door Unlock appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Off: None of the doors will
automatically unlock.
Driver Only At Off: Only the
driver's door will unlock when the
ignition is turned off.
All At Off (default on Manual
Transmission): All of the doors will
unlock when the ignition is
turned off.
All In Park (default on Automatic
Transmission) (Automatic
Transmission Only): All of the
doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park).
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.

Instruments and Controls
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Remote Door Lock Feedback
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or
keyless access transmitter, or when
the vehicle is automatically locked
using the Keyless Locking feature.
You will not receive feedback when
locking the vehicle with the
transmitter if the doors are open.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 or “Keyless
Locking” later in this section for
more information.

Press the customization button until
Remote Door Lock appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Off: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on
the transmitter.
Lights Only: The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock
button on the transmitter.
Horn Only: The horn will sound on
the second press of the lock button
on the transmitter.
Horn & Lights (default): The
exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the
transmitter, and the horn will sound
when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the
previous command.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.

4-53

To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Remote Door Unlock Feedback
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or
keyless access transmitter, or when
the vehicle is automatically
unlocked using the Keyless Unlock
feature. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the
vehicle with the transmitter if the
doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 or “Keyless
Unlock” later in this section for more
information.

4-54

Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until
Remote Door Unlock appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:

Press the customization button until
Exit Lighting appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/
down button to scroll through the
following settings:

Lights Off: The exterior lamps will
not flash when you press the unlock
button on the transmitter.

Off: The exterior lamps will not
turn on.

Lights On (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press the
unlock button on the transmitter.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Exit Lighting
This feature allows you to select the
amount of time you want the
exterior lamps to remain on when it
is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

10 Seconds (default): The exterior
lamps will stay on for 10 seconds.
30 Seconds: The exterior lamps
will stay on for 30 seconds.
2 Minutes: The exterior lamps will
stay on for two minutes.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Approach Lighting
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to have the exterior
lights turn on briefly during low light

periods after unlocking the vehicle
using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) or keyless access transmitter.
Press the customization button until
Approach Lighting appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Off: The exterior lights will not turn
on when you unlock the vehicle with
the transmitter.
On (default): If it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the
vehicle with the transmitter.
The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button
on the transmitter is pressed, or the
vehicle is no longer off. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for more
information.

Instruments and Controls
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

Keyless Locking

Factory Settings
This feature allows you to set all of
the customization features back to
their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until
Factory Settings appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Restore All (default): The
customization features will be set to
their factory default settings.
No Change: The customization
features will not be set to their
factory default settings.

If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal
vehicle exit. When the ignition is
turned off and all doors become
closed, the vehicle will determine
how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle
interior. If at least one keyless
access transmitter has been
removed from the interior of the
vehicle, the doors will lock after
several seconds.
For example, if there are two
keyless access transmitters in the
vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless
access transmitter locked in the
vehicle can still be used to start the
vehicle or unlock the doors,

4-55

if needed. A person approaching the
outside of the locked vehicle without
an authorized keyless access
transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a
transmitter in the vehicle. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for more
information.
You may temporarily disable the
keyless locking feature by pressing
the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door.
Keyless locking will then remain
disabled until a door lock switch is
pressed or until the power mode
transitions from the off power mode.
To select whether the horn sounds
or the lights flash when the vehicle
is locked, see “Remote Door Lock”
earlier in this section.

4-56

Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until
Keyless Locking appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Off (default): The keyless locking
feature will be disabled.
On: The keyless locking feature will
be enabled.
The doors will automatically lock
several seconds after you turn the
ignition off, remove a keyless
access transmitter from the interior
of the vehicle, and close all of the
doors.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

Keyless Unlock
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you
approach the vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter and
open the driver's door. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for more
information.
To select whether the lights flash
when the vehicle is unlocked, see
“Remote Door Unlock” earlier in this
section.
Press the customization button until
Keyless Unlock appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this

feature. Then press the menu
up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Entry Door Only: Only the driver's
door will automatically unlock when
you approach the vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter and
open the driver's door.
All Doors (default): All doors will
automatically unlock when you
approach the vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter and
open the driver's door.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Chime Volume
This feature allows you to select the
volume level of the chime.

Instruments and Controls
Press the customization button until
Chime Volume appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/
down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Normal: The chime volume will be
set to a normal level.
Loud: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay at the
last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Easy Exit Recall
If the vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preference
for the automatic easy exit seat
feature and the remote memory

feature. See the “Memory Seat”
information under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 2‑4 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
Easy Exit Recall appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Automatic Off (default): No
automatic seat exit recall or remote
memory recall will occur. The easy
exit seat recall will only occur after
pressing the easy exit seat button.
The automatic memory recall will
only occur after pressing the
memory buttons.
Automatic On (Keyless Access):
If the features are enabled though
the Easy Exit Setup menu, the
driver's seat will move back, and if
the vehicle has the power tilt wheel
and telescopic steering feature, the
power steering column will move up
and forward when the vehicle is

4-57

parked and the driver door is
opened, or after pressing the easy
exit seat button.
The automatic easy exit seat
movement will only occur one time
after the driver door is opened. Also
the driver's seat, outside mirrors and
steering wheel will automatically
move to the stored driving position
when the unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter is
pressed or when the driver door is
opened. The steering column will
also move on vehicles with the
power tilt and telescopic steering
feature.
Automatic On (Key Access): If
the features are enabled though the
Easy Exit Setup menu, the driver's
seat will move back, and if the
vehicle has the power tilt wheel and
telescopic steering feature, the
power steering column will move up
and forward when the key is
removed from the ignition or after
pressing the easy exit seat button.

4-58

Instruments and Controls

The automatic easy exit seat
movement will only occur one time
after the key is removed from the
ignition. If the automatic movement
has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and
remove it again, the seat and
steering column will stay in the
original exit position, unless a
memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
Also, the driver's seat, outside
mirrors and steering wheel will
automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed. The
steering column will also move on
vehicles with the power tilt and
telescopic steering feature.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

Easy Exit Setup
If the vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select which areas will
recall with the automatic easy exit
seat feature. The remote memory
recall feature is unaffected by this
selection. It also allows you to turn
off the automatic easy exit feature.
See the “Memory Seat” information
under Power Seat Adjustment on
page 2‑4 and “Easy Exit Recall”
earlier for more information.
Press the customization button until
Easy Exit Setup appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/
down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off: No automatic seat exit will
recall.
Tilt/Telescope: The steering wheel
tilt and steering column telescope
features will recall.

All (default): The driver's seat and
the steering wheel tilt and steering
column telescope features will
recall, if the vehicle has this option.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

Exiting the Feature
Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be
exited when any of the following
occurs:
.

The vehicle is no longer in
ON/RUN.

The trip/fuel or vehicle
information DIC buttons are
pressed.

The end of the feature settings
menu is reached and exited.

A 40 second time period has
elapsed with no selection made.

Instruments and Controls

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see if
you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.

4-59

] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.

For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.

X : Push this button for hands-free,
voice-activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn-by-turn
navigation.

OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.

Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigation
and Hands-Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all
OnStar services are available on all
vehicles. For more information see
the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or
TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to
speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all
times.

4-60

Instruments and Controls

The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
an OnStar call center when Q is
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the
airbags or ACR system deploy. This
information usually includes the
vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.

The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing OnStar service at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.

OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑7 for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.

Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may not
be functioning properly. Press Q
and request a vehicle diagnostic.
If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.

Instruments and Controls

Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
and Science Canada.

Universal Remote System
Programming

This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.

Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Home Remote. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this
section.

4-61

When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or
gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.

4-62

Instruments and Controls

Programming the Universal
Home Remote System

To program up to three devices:

For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
1. From inside the vehicle, press
and hold down the two outside
buttons at the same time,
releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds. This step will
erase the factory settings or all
previously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do
not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
(1 to 3 inches) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held
transmitter was supplied by the
manufacturer of your garage
door opener receiver (motor
head unit).

Instruments and Controls
3. At the same time, press and
hold both the Universal Home
Remote button to be used to
control the garage door and the
hand-held transmitter button. Do
not release the Universal Home
Remote button or the hand-held
transmitter button until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.

4. The indicator light on the
Universal Home Remote will
flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home
Remote successfully receives
the frequency signal from the
hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained
Universal Home Remote button
and observe the indicator light.
.

If the indicator light stays
on continuously, the
programming is complete
and the garage door should
move when the Universal
Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
There is no need to
continue programming
Steps 6 through 8.

4-63

If the Universal Home
Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then
turns to a constant light,
continue with the
programming Steps 6
through 8.
It may be helpful to have
another person assist with
the remaining steps.

4-64

Instruments and Controls
7. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
you press this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 8.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 have
been completed, locate inside
the garage the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and
color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.

8. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the Universal Home Remote
button, selected in Step 3 to
control the garage door, for
two seconds, and then release
it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same
button a second time for
two seconds, and then release
it. Again, if the door does not
move, press and hold the same
button a third time for
two seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remote
should now activate the
garage door.
To program the remaining two
Universal Home Remote buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming
the Universal Home Remote
System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal
Home Remote buttons.

Instruments and Controls
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call
1-800-355-3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long
enough for Universal Home Remote
to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures,
regardless of where you live,
replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the
following:
Continue to press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The
Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under
“Programming Universal Home
Remote” to complete the training
procedure.

4-65

Universal Remote System
Operation
Using Universal Remote
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Remote button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.

4-66

Instruments and Controls

Erasing Universal Remote
Buttons

Reprogramming a Single
Universal Remote Button

All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.

To reprogram any of the three
Universal Remote buttons, repeat
the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with
Step 2.

To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Remote device:

For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices on page 12‑3.

1. Press and hold down the two
outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.

Lighting

Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Load Management . . . .
Battery Power Protection . . . . . .
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7

5-1

Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The exterior lamp control is
located towards the end of the
turn signal/lane change lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn
the band with this symbol on it to
operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has
four positions:
O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on and off automatically,
depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.

5-2

Lighting

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
.

Sidemarker Lamps

Taillamps

License Plate Lamps

Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.

Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
Push the turn signal/lane change
lever away from you to turn the high
beams on. Pull the lever towards
you and then release it to return to
low beams.
If the vehicle is turned off while the
high beams are on, they will come
on the next time the vehicle is
started.

Flash-to-Pass
This feature allows the high-beam
headlamps to be used to signal the
driver in front of you that you want
to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/lane
change lever toward you to use this
feature. When this is done the
following will occur:
.

If the headlamps are off,
in low-beam or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode,
the high-beam headlamps will
turn on. They will stay on as
long as the lever is held there.
Release the lever to turn
them off.

If the headlamps are already in
high-beam mode, they will
remain on high-beam.

Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the
exterior lamp control is left on in
either the headlamp or parking lamp
position and the driver's door is
opened with the ignition off.

This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high beam headlamps are on.

Lighting

Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make either
the reduced intensity low-beam
headlamps or dedicated DRL's
come on when the following
conditions are met:
.

It is still daylight and the ignition
is in ON/RUN or START.

The exterior lamp control is in off
or AUTO and the headlamps
are off.

The automatic transmission is
not in P (Park).

When DRL's are on, only the
reduced intensity low-beam
headlamps or dedicated DRL's will
be on. The other exterior lamps and
the instrument panel cluster will not
be on.
When the exterior lamp control is in
AUTO and it is dark enough outside,
the DRL turns off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is
bright enough outside, the low-beam
headlamps will go off, and the DRL
will turn back on. If the vehicle is
started in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes
on immediately. Once the vehicle
leaves the garage, it takes about
one minute for the automatic
headlamp system to change to
DRL if it is light outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster
may not be as bright as usual.

5-3

Make sure the instrument panel
brightness lever is in the full bright
position. See Instrument Panel
Illumination Control on page 5‑5.
Turning the exterior lamp control to
off or to the low-beam headlamp
position will turn off the DRL. If the
parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still
turn off.
This will work regardless of gear
position and whether or not the
parking brake is set.

5-4

Lighting

Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)

Hazard Warning Flashers
| Hazard Warning Flasher:

The Adaptive Forward Lighting
System (AFL) pivots the headlamps
horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. To enable
AFL, set the exterior lamp switch on
the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position. Moving the switch out of
the AUTO position will deactivate
the system. AFL will operate when
the vehicle speed is greater than
2 mph (3 km/h). AFL will not
operate when the transmission is in
R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately
operable after starting the vehicle;
driving a short distance is required
to calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 5‑1.

Press this button located on the
instrument panel near the audio
system, to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
This warns others that you are
having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.

Turn and Lane-Change
Signals

Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it briefly until the lane
change is complete. The arrow will
automatically flash three times.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 9‑41.
Turn Signal On Chime

An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.

If the turn signal is left on for about
1.6 km (1 mile), a warning chime will
sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON
message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display.
See “Turn Signal On” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for more information.

Lighting

5-5

Fog Lamps

Interior Lighting

Reading Lamps

Use the fog lamps for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions. The fog
lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.

Instrument Panel
Illumination Control

The reading lamps are located on
the overhead console. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.

# (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp
band on the lever up to # and
release it, to turn the fog lamps on
or off. The band will return to its
original position.
The parking lamps must be on for
the fog lamps to work.
If the high-beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will also
turn off. They will turn back on again
when you change back to low-beam
headlamps.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.

The instrument panel brightness
knob is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
column.

D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights. Turn the
knob completely clockwise to turn
on the interior lamps.

For manual operation, press the
button next to each lamp to turn it
on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they
automatically shut off 10 minutes
after the ignition has been
turned off.

5-6

Lighting

Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on
the reading and dome lamps and
the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control, when a door is opened or
if the transmitter unlock button
is pressed. If activated by the
transmitter, the lighting stays on for
about 25 seconds. The entry lighting
system uses the light sensor on the
instrument panel; so it must be dark
outside in order for the lamps to
turn on. The lamps turn off about
25 seconds after the last door is
closed. They dim then turn off if the
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
They immediately turn off if the
power locks are used.

Parade Dimming
This feature does not let the
instrument panel backlight dim
during daylight hours while the
key is in the ignition and the
headlamps are on. Parade dimming
automatically works with the light
sensor, located on top of the
dashboard. If it is dark enough
outside and the parking lamps are
on, the backlight on the instrument
panel can be adjusted by turning
the instrument panel brightness
knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to brighten or dim the lighting.
See Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 5‑5.

Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gage or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.

Lighting
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays,
it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑31.

Battery Power Protection
This feature helps to prevent battery
drain if accessory lamps are left on.
If accessory lamps such as the
vanity mirror, cargo, reading,
console, or glove box are left on,

5-7

they automatically time-out after
about 20 minutes. To reset the
battery protection, all of the
above lamps must be turned off
or the ignition must be in the
ACC/ACCESSORY position.

Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about
10 minutes after the ignition is
turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking
lamps or headlamps have been left
on. This protects against draining
the battery. The battery saver
does not work if the headlamps are
turned on after the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF.
To keep the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, turn the lamps back on
with the exterior lamp control.

5-8

Lighting

2 NOTES

Infotainment System

Infotainment
System

Introduction
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.

Introduction

{ WARNING

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could cause
a crash resulting in injury or
death to you or others. Do not
give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.

Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Diversity Antenna System . . . 6-15

Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . .
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-16
6-19
6-23
6-27
6-35

This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.

Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.

Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.

Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

6-1

For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 8‑3.
Notice: Contact your dealer/
retailer before adding any
equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑19 for more
information.

6-2

Infotainment System

Navigation/Radio System

Operation

For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System manual.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.

Full View of Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar

Infotainment System

6-3

Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust bass,
midrange, or treble:
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob
until the tone control tabs
display.

Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio, Hard Drive Device (HDD),
and USB
The vehicle may have one of these
radios as its audio system.
If the vehicle does not have one of
these radio systems, it may have a
navigation radio system. See the
Navigation System manual for more
information on the navigation audio
system.

Turning the System On or Off
VOL P (Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on and off.

Volume Control
VOL P (Volume/Power): Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.

2. Continue pressing the TUNE/
TONE knob, or press the softkey
under the desired tab to highlight
the desired tone setting.
3. To increase the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:
.

Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
clockwise.

Press the

\ FWD button.
Press the ¨ SEEK button.

6-4

Infotainment System

4. To decrease the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:
.

Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
counterclockwise.

Press the

s REV button.
Press the © SEEK button.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey under the BASS,
MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds. A beep may sound
and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle
position, press the TUNE/TONE
knob for more than two seconds.

Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
adjust balance or fade:
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob
until the speaker control tabs
display.

2. Continue pressing the TUNE/
TONE knob, or press the softkey
under the desired tab to highlight
the desired tone setting.

To quickly adjust all speaker and
tone controls to the middle position,
press the TUNE/TONE knob for
more than two seconds.

3. To increase the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:

Digital Signal
Processing (DSP)

Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
clockwise.

Press the

\ FWD button.
Press the ¨ SEEK button.

4. To decrease the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:
.

Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
counterclockwise.

Press the

s REV button.
Press the © SEEK button.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to
the middle position, press the
pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than
two seconds. A beep may sound
and the level adjusts to the middle
position.

If the radio has this feature, it has
either a Bose® sound system or a
Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® sound
system. DSP is used to provide a
choice of different listening
experiences.
To choose a DSP setting:
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to
display the tone/speaker, and
DSP labels.
2. Press the pushbutton located
under the DSP label.
3. Press the Back button to exit the
display. To return to the original
display, repeatedly press the
Back button or wait for the
display to time out.

Infotainment System
The DSP settings available are:
.

Normal: Select for normal mode,
this provides the best sound
quality for all seating positions.
Driver: Select to adjust the
audio for the driver to receive
the best possible sound quality.
Rear: Select to adjust the audio
for the rear seat passengers to
receive the best possible sound
quality.
Centerpoint®: Select to
enable Bose® Centerpoint®.
Centerpoint® produces a
full vehicle surround sound
listening experience from CD,
non-5.1 surround sound DVD-A,
MP3/WMA, AUX (auxiliary)
input, or XM digital audio source
and will deliver five independent
audio channels from
conventional two channel
stereo recording.
This feature is not available in
AM/FM radio mode.

If the vehicle is equipped with
the Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround®
sound system, the radio
can support the playback of
5.1 Surround Sound DVD-A
discs or DTS 5.1 Surround
Sound CD discs. When a
5.1 Surround Sound formatted
disc is playing, DSP options
available are:
‐ 5.1 Surround + Normal: Best
for all seating positions.
‐ 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best for
the rear seating position.

System Settings
CONFIG: Press to adjust the
number of favorites pages, auto
volume, XM (if equipped), and HDD
(if available) settings. The FAV,
AUTO VOL, XM (if equipped), HDD
(if available), and Back tabs display.
Press the softkey located under the
Back tab to go back to the previous
display.

6-5

Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
The number of favorites pages can
be setup using the CONFIG button.
To setup the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV tab.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing the
softkey located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin
the process of programming
favorites for the chosen number
of pages.

6-6

Infotainment System

Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV)
A Radio with SCV automatically
adjusts the sound to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle
speeds up or slows down, so that
the volume is consistent while
driving. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.

Noise Compensation Technology
If the vehicle has the Radio with
DVD Audio, HDD, and USB, it
has Bose AudioPilot® noise
compensation technology.
When turned on, AudioPilot®
continuously adjusts the audio
system equalization, to compensate
for background noise.
To activate AudioPilot®:

2. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.

1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOL tab on the radio
display.

2. Press the pushbutton under the
AUTO VOL label on the radio
display.

4. Press the softkey under the
desired Speed Compensated
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of
radio volume compensation.
The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each
higher setting allows for more
radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.

3. Press either the On or Off label
located under the AUTO VOL
display to turn this feature on or
off. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds.
This feature is most effective at
lower radio volume settings where
background noise can affect how
the music being played through the
vehicle's audio system is heard. At
higher volume settings, where the

music is much louder than the
background noise, there may be
little or no adjustments by
AudioPilot®. For additional
information on AudioPilot®, visit
www.bose.com/audiopilot.

Radio Message
Locked: Displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked
up the infotainment system. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for
service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer.

Other Information
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB utilizes Gracenote®
technology to provide Song, Artist,
Album, and Genre information for
many CD audio discs and is
capable of playing DVD-A and DTS
encoded discs, (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.).

Infotainment System
Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories.
Gracenote® Database
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service, Music recognition
technology, and related data are
provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote
is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more
information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data
from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more
of the following U.S. Patents:
#5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and
other patents issued or pending.

Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for
U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo
are trademarks of Gracenote.
If you require more information
regarding the use of the Gracenote
Service, visit: www.gracenote.com/
corporate.
For the data provided by
Gracenote® Music Recognition
Service, the content is not
necessarily guaranteed 100%.
Regarding the use of Gracenote
Music Recognition Service. When
this product is used, it is necessary
to agree to the following articles.
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables
this application to perform disc

6-7

and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title
information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded
databases (collectively, “Gracenote
Servers”) and to perform other
functions.
You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End-User
functions of this application or
device. You agree that you will use
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal
non-commercial use only. You agree
not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data to any third
party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.

6-8

Infotainment System

You agree that your non-exclusive
license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if
you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership
rights.
Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against
you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a
unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to
allow the Gracenote service to
count queries without knowing
anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed
to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no
representations or warranties,
express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote Data
from in the Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote reserves the right to
delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data
categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems sufficient.
No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software
or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to
provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER.
IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.

Infotainment System

Radio
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
FM/AM: Press to choose between
FM and AM.

Press to choose the XM™ band
(if equipped).
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through
the station list. Press the MENU/
SELECT knob to select the desired
station.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song. When information
is not available, No Information
displays.

¨ SEEK/ © SEEK: Press to go
to the previous or to the next radio
station and stay there.
The radio only tunes into stations
with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
Softkeys: Press to select preset
stations.

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio
Data System (RDS) feature. RDS
is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when
the information is available. While
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.

6-9

Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning
If the radio station is not known:
Briefly press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
The radio automatically searches for
the next receivable station. If the
radio does not find a station, it
switches automatically to a more
sensitive search level. If it still does
not find a station, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
If the radio station is known:
Press and hold ¨ SEEK or
© SEEK until the desired station
on the pop-up frequency display is
almost reached, then release the
button.
Manual Tuning
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
frequency on the pop-up display.

6-10

Infotainment System

Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite

To store a station as a favorite,
perform the following steps:

Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while the
vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys
below the radio station frequency
tabs on the display and by using
the radio favorites page button
(FAV button). Press the FAV button
to go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.

2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station is to
be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
When that softkey is pressed
and released, the radio recalls
the station that was set.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can
be setup using the CONFIG button.
To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV label.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing the
softkey located below the
displayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming
favorites for the chosen number
of pages.

Time-shifting — Pause and
Rewind Live FM/AM
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB has the ability to rewind
60 minutes of FM/AM and XM
(if equipped) content. While listening
to the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered to the HDD.
Press r / j (play/pause) To pause
the radio. The radio display will
show the Time Shift buffer status
bar. The status bar shows the
amount of content that is stored in
the buffer and the current pause
point.

Infotainment System
To resume playback from
the current pause point,
press r / j again. The radio will
no longer be playing “live” radio.
Instead, time shifted content is
being played from the buffer. When
the radio is playing time shifted
content from the buffer, a buffer
status bar shows below the station
number on the left side of screen.

When the radio station is
changed, the buffer is cleared and
automatically restarted for the
current station. You cannot rewind
to content from a previously tuned
station.

Satellite Radio

Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not
available while recording or while
other sources of playback are
selected.

XM Satellite Radio Service

Pausing AM/FM or XM™
(if equipped) with the Vehicle
Turned Off

On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD
button multiple times to rewind or
fast forward. Each press will rewind
or fast forward 30 seconds of
content. On XM, press the REV or
FWD button multiple time to jump to
the previous or next song or
commercial.

If AM/FM or XM is paused when the
vehicle is turned off, the radio will
continue to buffer the current radio
station for up to one hour. If the
vehicle is turned back on within
one hour, the radio will automatically
resume playback from the pause
point.

6-11

Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
XM is a satellite radio service that is
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required
to receive the XM service. For
more information, contact XM
at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

6-12

Infotainment System

Control Buttons

XM Categories

Selecting a Station by Station List

The buttons used to control the
radio are:

XM stations are organized in
categories.

The infotainment system can list all
XM stations.

m : Press to choose the XM™ band
(if equipped).

Removing or Adding Categories

To select a station from the
station list:

TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through
the category list. Press the MENU/
SELECT knob to select the desired
category.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song. When information
is not available, No Information
displays.

¨ SEEK/ © SEEK:

Press to go
to the previous or to the next radio
station.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
Softkeys: Press to select preset
stations.

1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Press the softkey below the
XM tab.
3. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or
the MENU/SELECT knob to
scroll through the available
categories.
4. Press any softkey below the
Remove or Add tab to add or
remove the displayed category.
5. Press any softkey below the
Restore All tab to restore all
removed categories.

Selecting an XM Station
Seek Tuning
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK to go
to the next or previous station.

1. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob and
highlight the desired station.
2. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to
select the station.
Selecting a Station by Category
The infotainment system can list XM
stations by genre.
To select a station from the
category list:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
and highlight the desired genre,
then press the MENU/SELECT
knob to select the genre.
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
and highlight the desired station,
then press the MENU/SELECT
knob to select the station.

Infotainment System

Press to switch to XM mode.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to
select from a list of available XM
stations. Turn the TUNE/TONE
knob until the desired station is
highlighted. Press the TUNE/TONE
knob to select the highlighted
station. The highlighted station will
also automatically be selected if the
TUNE/TONE is released and no
longer turned.

Storing an XM Station as a
Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while the
vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys
below the radio station frequency
tabs on the display and by using
the radio favorites page button
(FAV button). Press the FAV button
to go through up to six pages of

favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
To store a station as a favorite,
perform the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station is to
be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
When that softkey is pressed
and released, the radio recalls
the station that was set.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.

6-13

The number of favorites pages can
be setup using the CONFIG button.
To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV label.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing the
softkey located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming
favorites for the chosen number
of pages.

6-14

Infotainment System

XM Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking the
XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.

Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.

CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category. The system is working
properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer/retailer.

No Title Info: No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the
service.

Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.

No CAT Info: No category
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.

Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.

No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.

Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.

Infotainment System
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/
retailer.

Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.

FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.

6-15

Cellular Phone Usage

The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.

Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on. This
interference can cause an increased
level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

The multi-band antenna is located
on the roof of the vehicle. The
antenna is used for the AM/FM
radio, OnStar, the XM Satellite
Radio Service System, and GPS; if
the vehicle has these features.
Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
performance of the AM/FM radio,
OnStar, XM system, and GPS may
be affected if the sunroof is open.

XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.

Diversity Antenna System

6-16

Infotainment System

Audio Players
CD Player
The Infotainment system's CD
player can play audio CDs and
MP3 CDs.
CDs that are 8 cm (3 in.) in diameter
will not work in the CD player.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD, the sound quality
can be reduced due to disc quality,
the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the disc
has been handled. Handle discs
carefully. Store CDs in their original
cases or other protective cases and
away from direct sunlight and dust.
The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of
a disc is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the disc may
not play properly or not at all. Do
not touch the bottom side of a disc
while handling it; this could damage

the surface. Pick up discs by
grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a disc is soiled,
take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a disc, it could
get caught in the CD player. If a
label is needed, label the top of the
recorded disc with a marking pen.
The use of disc lens cleaners for
discs is not advised, due to the risk
of contaminating the lens of the disc
optics with lubricants internal to the
CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.

While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.

Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the CD
player are:
CD: Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The disc and/
or track number displays when a CD
is in the player.

¨:

Press to select

TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press
to select tracks.
MENU/SELECT: Turn and then
press to select.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track.

Infotainment System

\ FWD (Fast Forward):

Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track.

Inserting a CD (Six-Disc CD
Player)

6-17

To insert multiple CDs:

^ (Load) : Press to load CDs into
the Six-Disc CD player.

^ (Load) :

Press to load CDs into
the CD player. This CD player holds
up to six CDs.

1. Press and hold this button for
five seconds. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays.

Z (Eject):

To insert one CD:

2. Follow the displayed instruction
on when to insert the discs. The
CD player takes up to six CDs.

Press to eject the disc.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press
and hold for two seconds to eject all
discs.

Inserting a CD (Single Disc
Player)
With the printed side facing up,
insert a CD into the audio CD slot
until it is drawn in. The CD track
number and a Shuffle label displays
and begins playback.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
while a CD in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.

1. Press and release the load
button.
2. Wait for the message to insert
the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD
partway into the slot, label side
up. The player pulls the CD in.
A Shuffle label and the DISC
icon displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located
below the Shuffle label to play
the tracks of a current disc in
random order. Press the
pushbutton again to turn Shuffle
off. Shuffle Off displays.
5. The CD resumes normal
playback.

3. Press the Load button again to
cancel loading more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
while a CD in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the disc
number displays on the upper right
side of the screen and the track
number displays at the left and
center of the screen. The Shuffle
and Disc labels appear below. Press
the pushbuttons located under the
Disc label to change to another disc.

6-18

Infotainment System

The CD begins playback of the first
track on the selected disc. As each
new track starts to play the track
number displays in the left and
center of the screen.

Playing a CD
Selecting a CD Track
Tracks can be selected using the
seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob,
or the MENU/SELECT knob.
To use the seek buttons:
Press the © SEEK button to go to
the start of the current track, if more
than five seconds have played.
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to
the next track. If © SEEK or ¨
SEEK is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.

To use the TUNE/TONE knob or the
MENU SELECT knob:
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or the
MENU/SELECT knob to highlight
the desired track then press the
TUNE/TONE knob or MENU/
SELECT knob to select the track.
Fast Forward and Rewind

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed
time of the track displays. Release
to resume playing the track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):

Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the
track.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
tab to play the tracks of a CD in
random order. Press again to turn
Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.

For vehicles with a Radio with
Six-Disc CD player, the shuffle
feature only works on the disc that
is currently playing.

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
CD players with the MP3 feature are
capable of playing an MP3/WMA
CD-R or CD-RW disc, see MP3 on
page 6‑23 for more information.

Disc Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message
displays and/or the disc ejects, it
could be for one of the following
reasons:
.

The radio system does not
support the playlist format, the
compressed audio format, or the
data file format.

It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the disc should play.

Infotainment System
.

The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
disc should play.

The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.

The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.

There could have been a
problem while burning the disc.

The label could be caught in the
CD/DVD-A player.

If the disc is not playing correctly, for
any other reason, try a known
good disc.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message,
write it down and provide it to your
dealer/retailer when reporting the
problem.

CD/DVD Player
The Infotainment system's CD/DVD
player can play audio discs and
MP3 discs.
Discs that are 8 cm (3 in.) in
diameter will not work in the CD/
DVD player.
The CD/DVD player does not
support the playback of DVD video
discs. If DVD video disc is inserted
into the player, the radio displays
“Read Error Please Check Disc”
and ejects the disc.
Care of CDs and DVDs
If playing a CD/DVD, the sound
quality can be reduced due to disc
quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the disc
has been handled. Handle discs
carefully. Store CDs and DVDs
in their original cases or other
protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust.

6-19

The CD/DVD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a disc is damaged, such
as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the disc may not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side
of a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a disc is soiled,
take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Care of the CD/DVD Player
Do not add labels to a disc, it could
get caught in the CD/DVD player.
If a label is needed, label the top
of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.

6-20

Infotainment System

The use of disc lens cleaners for
discs is not advised, due to the risk
of contaminating the lens of the disc
optics with lubricants internal to the
CD/DVD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.

Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
CD/DVD player are:
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
switch between CD/DVD, auxiliary
input, and USB devices.

Press to select

TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press
to select tracks.

While recording a disc to HDD, the
fast forward does not function.

MENU/SELECT: Turn and then
press to select.

Z (Eject):

s REV (Fast Reverse):

Press to
reverse playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change
playback to a speed of 2X. Each
successive press changes playback
to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X.
Press r / j to resume normal
playback. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
While recording a disc to HDD, the
fast reverse does not function.

\ FWD (Fast Forward):

Press to
advance playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change
playback to a speed of 2X. Each
successive press changes playback
to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X.
Press r / j to resume normal
playback. The elapsed time of the
track displays.

Press to eject the disc.

Inserting a Disc
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the audio CD/DVD
slot until it is drawn in. The disc
track number and a Shuffle label
displays and begins playback.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
while a disc in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the disc starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.

Infotainment System
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to
the next track. If © SEEK or ¨
SEEK is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
To use the TUNE/TONE knob:
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to
highlight the desired track then
press the TUNE/TONE knob to
select the track.
To use the MENU/SELECT knob:
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the desired track then
press the MENU/SELECT knob to
select the track.
Fast Forward and Rewind

s REV (Fast Reverse):

Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed
time of the track displays. Release
to resume playing the track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward):

Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB is capable of playing DVD
audio discs in the Bose® 5.1 Cabin
surround sound system.
Insert the DVD audio disc into the
CD/DVD player. DVD AUDIO
displays and playback begins. The
Group and track number displays
during playback.

6-21

Selecting a DVD-A Track
Tracks can be selected using the
seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob,
or the MENU/SELECT knob.
To use the seek buttons:
Press © SEEK button to go to the
start of the current track, if more
than five seconds have played.
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to
the next track. If the © SEEK or
¨ SEEK button is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward
through the tracks within the current
group.
To use the TUNE/TONE knob:
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to
display a list of all tracks in all
groups on the DVD audio disc and
to highlight tracks. Stop turning the
TUNE/TONE knob or press the
TUNE/TONE knob to start playback
of the highlighted track.

6-22

Infotainment System

To use the MENU/SELECT knob:
Press the softkey under the Menu
tab to display a list of all Groups. To
change Groups, turn the MENU/
SELECT knob to highlight the
desired Group. Press the MENU/
SELECT knob to select it. Playback
begins from track 1 of the
highlighted Group.
Fast Forward and Rewind

s REV (Fast Reverse):

\ FWD (Fast Forward):

Press the softkey under the c tab
again while in DVDPreStop,
“DVDStop” displays. Press
the r / j button while in DVDStop
to begin playback from the
beginning of the DVD audio disc.

While recording a disc to HDD, the
fast forward does not function.

Selecting DVD Audio Streams

Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
tab to begin random playback of all
songs in the current Group. Press
again to turn off random playback.
Stopping DVD Audio Playback
Press the softkey under the c tab
to stop playback of the DVD audio
disc. “DVD PreStop” displays.
Press the r / j button to resume
playback from where it was
stopped.

Press the r / j button during DVD
audio playback to pause or resume
playback.
Each DVD audio Group may contain
audio content that is encoded in one
or two formats. For example, a
particular Group may have both a
5.1 surround audio stream and a
2.0 stereo audio stream available.
Press the softkey located under the
Audio label to display the current
audio stream playing. “Audio
Stream 1” or “Audio Stream 2” briefly
displays. Press the softkey located
under the Audio label again to
toggle between Audio Stream 1 or
Audio Stream 2 (if available).

Infotainment System
Check the DSP settings to
determine if a 5.1 surround sound
Audio Stream is playing. See
Operation on page 6‑2 for more
information. Press the DSP tab
to see if the 5.1 + Normal or
5.1 + Rear settings are available
for selection. If these settings are
available, Audio Stream 1 is playing.

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
CD/DVD players with the MP3
feature are capable of playing an
MP3/WMA on DVD+/-R, CD-R,
or CD-RW discs. For more
information, see MP3 on page 6‑23
for more information.

Disc Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message
displays and/or the disc ejects, it
could be for one of the following
reasons:
.

The radio system does not
support the playlist format, the
compressed audio format, or the
data file format.

6-23

It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the disc should play.

MP3

The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
disc should play.

The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.

The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.

There could have been a
problem while burning the disc.

The Single CD and the Six-Disc CD
Radio will play MP3/WMA files that
were recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc. The HDD Radio and
can also play MP3/WMA files
recorded on DVD +/− R discs or
stored on a USB storage device.
Some USB storage devices may not
be supported.

The label could be caught in the
CD/DVD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly,
for any other reason, try a known
good disc.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message,
write it down and provide it to your
dealer/retailer when reporting the
problem.

MP3/WMA Format

The files can be recorded with the
following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a
variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album can display when
files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.

6-24

Infotainment System

Creating an MP3/WMA Disc

When creating a MP3/WMA disc:
.

Make sure the MP3/WMA files
are recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc.

Do not mix standard audio and
MP3/WMA files on one disc.

Make sure the CD does not
have more than a maximum of
50 folders and playlists, and
255 files to read and play.

Create a folder structure that
makes it easy to find songs
while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each
album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.

Avoid subfolders. The system
can support up to 8 subfolders
deep, keep the total number of
folders to a minimum to reduce
the complexity and confusion
during playback.

Create playlists that have a .m3u
or .wpl extension, other file
extensions may not work.

Minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist names. Long
file, folder, or playlist names,
or a combination of a large
number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player
to be unable to play up to the
maximum number of files,
folders, playlists, or sessions.
Finalize the audio disc before
burning it. Adding music to an
existing disc can cause the disc
not to function.

Playlists can be selected by using
the previous and next folder
buttons, the SEEK arrows,
\ FWD, or s REV buttons. An
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that
was recorded using no file folders
can also be played. If a CD-R or
CD-RW contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders and
playlists, and 255 files, the player
lets you access and navigate up to
the maximum, but all items over the
maximum are not accessible.

The HDD Radio can support more
than 255 files on an MP3/WMA disc.
The HDD Radio does not support
playlists on a disc or USB storage
device.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or
CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as
F1 DISC. All files contained directly
under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory
folders. Playlists (Px) are always
accessed after root folders or files.
The HDD Radio displays the root
directory of an MP3/WMA disc as
F1 MP3 and the root directory of a
USB storage device as F1 USB.

Infotainment System

6-25

Empty Directory or Folder

Order of Play

File System and Naming

If a root directory or a folder exists
somewhere in the file structure that
contains only folders/subfolders
and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances
to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio
files.

Tracks recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW play in the following order:

The song name displays the song
name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not in
the ID3 tag, the radio displays the
file name without the extension.

No Folder
When the CD contains only
compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder functions
do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
The radio displays F1 DISC for the
root directory.
When the CD contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no
folders, all files are located under
the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to
the root folder. The radio displays
F1 DISC for the root directory.

Play begins from the first track in
the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
track of the first playlist.
‐ Playlists can be changed by
pressing the next and previous
folder button.

Play begins from the first track in
the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the
display does not automatically show
the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as
the default display. The new track
name displays.

Track names longer than
32 characters are shortened. Parts
of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the file name is
not displayed.
The HDD Radio will display file
names with the extension.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however
they cannot be edited using the
radio. These playlists are special
folders containing compressed
audio song files. Playlists must have
a file extension of PLS or M3U.

6-26

Infotainment System

Playlists can be selected using the
previous and next folder buttons.
Tracks can be changed by pressing
the seek buttons or turning the tune
knob. Songs are played
sequentially; press the s REV or
\ FWD to reverse or advance
through the playing song.
The HDD Radio does not support
preprogrammed playlists. To create
a playlist on the HDD radio from
songs recorded to the HDD, see
Hard Drive Device (HDD) on
page 6‑27.

Playing an MP3/WMA From a
Disc or a USB Storage Device
Selecting an MP3 Track
Tracks can be selected using the
seek buttons, the TUNE/TONE
knob, or the softkeys below the
folder tabs on the infotainment
display.

To use the seek buttons:
Press the © SEEK button to go to
the start of the current track, if more
than five seconds have played.
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go
to the next track. If © SEEK or
¨ SEEK is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward
through the tracks on the disc.
To use the TUNE/TONE knob:
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to
highlight the desired track then
press the TUNE/TONE knob to
select the track.
To use the softkeys below the
folder tabs:
S Folder (Previous Folder): Press
the softkey under the Folder tab to
go to the first track in the previous
folder.

Folder T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey under the Folder tab to go to
the first track in the next folder.
Fast Forward and Rewind

Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the
track.

Infotainment System
Searching for MP3 Tracks
Tracks can be searched for by using
the menu system.

songs recorded to the HDD, see
Hard Drive Device (HDD) on
page 6‑27.

To use the menu system:

Quick Jump

1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to display the MP3 Menu.

To scroll up or down the list of
Artists, Albums, or Song Titles,
press and hold the softkey located
under the FWD or REV tab.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight an option from the MP3
Menu. The available options are:
.

Playlists*

Tracks

Folders

Artists

Albums

Song Titles

AudioBook

3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the desired option.
*The HDD Radio does not support
preprogrammed playlists. To create
a playlist on the HDD radio from

To jump to the beginning, middle,
or last section of the list:
.

Press the first softkey located
under the display to go to the
beginning section of the list.

Press the second softkey
located under the display to go
to the middle section of the list.

Press the third softkey located
under the display to go to the
last section of the list.

Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
tab to play the tracks of the current
folder in random order. Press again
to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off
displays.

6-27

Hard Drive Device (HDD)
To use the HDD, tracks must be
recorded from a CD, DVD, or USB
device first.

Recording From Audio Discs
REC (Record): Press to start
recording tracks from the disc while
it is playing. The radio has the
option to record the current track
playing or all tracks from the CD.
Press the softkey under the desired
record option.
The last radio station that was on
begins playing and a status bar
appears on the top of the display
when the recording process starts.
The status bar disappears when the
process has ended. The recorded
songs are now available.

6-28

Infotainment System

Copy Protected CD(s)
Make sure the disc is not
copy-protected. The radio does
not copy a copy-protected CD to
the HDD.
Deleting a Recorded Song or
Category
DEL (Delete): Press the DEL
button to delete the track that is
currently playing or select a track
from one of the song lists.
To Delete an entire category, select
a category and press DEL.
Stopping the Recording
While recording from the audio CD,
press the REC button to display the
stop recording option. Press the
softkey under this option to confirm
the selection.

Ejecting a CD or Turning Off The
Vehicle While Recording
If the CD is ejected or the vehicle
is turned off before the recording
process has completed, tracks that
have been completely recorded are
stored to the HDD. Incomplete
tracks are discarded.
Re-recording Audio CDs
If a CD has already been recorded,
the radio system will not record
the contents again. If a partially
recorded CD is selected for
recording, only those songs which
are not already on the HDD will be
recorded.
Audio CD Song, Artist, Album and
Genre Information
Radios with HDD, contain a
Gracenote® Database that the
radio uses to determine the song,
artist, album and genre information.

The Gracenote® Database allows
the radio to record an audio CD to
the HDD and store the content
using song, artist, album and genre
information.
Newly released audio CDs as well
as some less common audio CDs
may not be found in the Gracenote®
Database stored on the HDD.
If these audio CDs contain CD-text,
the radio will use the CD-text
information when recording the
content to the HDD. If an audio CD
is not found in the Gracenote®
Database and it does not have
CD-text information, the radio will
record the audio CD with all song,
artist, album and genre names as
“NO INFO”.

Infotainment System
Songs recorded with “NO INFO” to
the HDD will be hard to sort,
identify, and select. To make HDD
navigation easier, CDs with “NO
INFO” can first be converted to MP3
format with Tag information on a
home computer and then recorded
to the HDD from an MP3 disc or
USB device.
Occasionally, the radio may find
more than one match in Gracenote®
Database for an audio CD that has
been recorded. If this happens, the
radio will display “Multi-Hit” for the
name information when the songs
are selected from the HDD. With a
“Muli-Hit” song playing, press the
button below the EDIT tab to bring
up the list of multiple names found
in the Gracenote® Database. Use
the Menu/Select knob to highlight
and select the correct name for the
“Multi-Hit” recorded CD.

The Gracenote® Database stored
on the HDD can be updated so that
it includes name information for
more recently released audio CDs.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information on Gracenote®
Database updates for the HDD
radio.

Recording From MP3/WMA
Discs or USB
REC (Record): Press to start
recording tracks from a MP3/WMA
disc or a USB device (excluding
iPod), while it is playing. The radio
has the option to record the current
track playing or all tracks from the
CD. Press the softkey under the
desired record option.

6-29

The last radio station that was on
begins playing and a status bar
appears on the top of the display
when the recording process starts.
The status bar disappears when the
process has ended. The recorded
songs are now available.
AAC and OGG Vorbis file types are
not fully supported. These file types
may or may not play and may be
shown without Tag information.
Without Tag information available,
these file types may be identified
only by file name.
AudioBooks from audible.com can
also be transferred to the HDD
using the record function. See
AudioBooks later in this section for
more information.

6-30

Infotainment System

USB Host Support

HDD Playback Mode

The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.

The infotainment system displays the current HDD playback mode. The
table below shows the display mode options and what happens as the mode
is displayed:

USB Supported Devices
.

USB Flash Drives

Mode

When Displayed

Portable USB Hard Drives

Shuffle

System is randomly playing back all HDD
content.

Artist

System is playing back content by a selected
Artist in alphabetical order.

Album

System is playing back content from a selected
album in track order.

Playing From the Hard Drive
Device
HDD (Hard Drive Device): Press
the HDD button to start playing
tracks from the HDD. HDD displays
and playback resumes from where it
was last stopped.

Genre

System is playing back content in a selected
Genre in alphabetical order.

Song

System is playing back all songs in alphabetical
order.

Playlist

System is playing back all songs from the
selected playlist in the order they were added.

AudioBook

System is playing back AudioBook content.

Infotainment System

6-31

HDD Menu

Quick Jump

Shuffle Songs

1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to display the HDD Menu.

To scroll up or down the list of
Artists, Albums, or Song Titles,
press and hold the softkey under
the FWD or REV tab.

Select this option from the HDD
Menu to randomly play back HDD
content.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight an option from the HDD
Menu. The available options are:
.

Shuffle Songs

Playlist

Artists

Albums

Song Titles

Genres

Recently Saved

AudioBook

3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the desired option.

To jump to the beginning, middle,
or last section of the list:
.

Press the first softkey located
under the display to go to the
beginning section of the list.

Press the second softkey
located under the display to go
to the middle section of the list.

Press the third softkey located
under the display to go to the
last section of the list.

Playlist
Select this option from the HDD
Menu to display all six favorite
Playlists, then select one of the six
playlist to display a list of songs that
have been added to that favorite
playlist. Select a song from the list
to begin playback of that song and
to put the HDD into the Playlist
mode. See “Saving HDD Favorites”
later in this section for more
information.

6-32

Infotainment System

HDD Categories

Select the HDD Menu category to
display the available items in each
individual category, then select an
item from one of these submenus to
display a list of songs related to that
menu item. Select a song to begin
playback of that song and to put the
HDD in the playback mode.

Audiblebook

Albums (6)

Recently Saved

Song Titles (77)

Select this option from the HDD
Menu to display the last 50 songs
added since the vehicle was
last turned on. The songs are
categorized into songs recorded
from CDs or USB devices.

The audible.com® playback requires
activation of the vehicle as a player
for downloaded content. The radio
system activates the audible.com®
system when information is found
on either a CD inserted into the
CD/DVD player or if a USB storage
device is connected. The Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) number
is a required in order to activate the
vehicle.

The HDD category mode can be
used to select a song by a particular
artist, album, or genre for playback.
As an example, the HDD Menu
displays a layout such as:
Artists (5)

Genres (3)
The radio system displays the
number of available items in each
individual category as shown on the
sample display. For example, the
sample display shows there is
content on the hard drive from
five individual artists.

The radio is able to play back
AudioBook content downloaded
from www.audible.com. This content
can be transferred into the HDD by
either burning it to a CD or copying
it to a USB storage device and then
recording it to the HDD.

Infotainment System
Saving HDD Favorites
Press the FAV button to change
between favorite modes during HDD
playback. The following favorite
modes are supported:
.

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Genres

6-33

Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the softkey under the
favorites selection. Store favorites according to the following table:
Favorites
Display Mode

Action on Press-and-Hold

Playlist

Adds currently playing track to the playlist
selected.

Artist

Saves the artist associated with the currently
playing track in the indicated favorites position.

Album

Saves the album associated with the currently
playing track in the indicated favorites position.

Genre

Saves the genre associated with the currently
playing track in the indicated favorites position.

Configuring HDD Favorites
Press the CONFIG button to display
the radio configuration options.
Press the softkey under the HDD
tab to display the available favorite
modes. Press the softkey under the
favorite tab to set the available
favorite modes. Available favorite
modes are highlighted.

Time-shifting — Pause and
Rewind Live FM/AM and XM™
(if equipped)
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB has the ability to rewind
60 minutes of FM/AM and XM
(if equipped) content. While listening
to the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered to the HDD.

6-34

Infotainment System

Press r / j (play/pause) To pause
the radio. The radio display will
show the Time Shift buffer status
bar. The status bar shows the
amount of content that is stored in
the buffer and the current pause
point.
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press r / j
again. The radio will no longer be
playing “live” radio. Instead, time
shifted content is being played from
the buffer. When the radio is playing
time shifted content from the buffer,
a buffer status bar shows below the
station number on the left side of
screen.

Press and hold the REV or FWD
buttons to rewind or fast forward
through the time shift buffer. Hold
FWD until the end of the currently
recorded buffer to resume “live”
radio playback. With “live” radio
playing, the radio display will no
longer show the buffer bar below
the station number.
On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD
button multiple times to rewind or
fast forward. Each press will rewind
or fast forward 30 seconds of
content. On XM, press the REV or
FWD button multiple time to jump to
the previous or next song or
commercial.
When the radio station is changed,
the buffer is cleared and
automatically restarted for the
current station. You cannot rewind
to content from a previously tuned
station.

Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not
available while recording or while
other sources of playback are
selected.
Pausing AM/FM or XM™
(if equipped) with the Vehicle
Turned Off
If AM/FM or XM is paused when the
vehicle is turned off, the radio will
continue to buffer the current radio
station for up to one hour. If the
vehicle is turned back on within
one hour, the radio will automatically
resume playback from the pause
point.

Infotainment System

Auxiliary Devices
The 3.5mm (1/8 in.) input jack and
the USB port (if equipped), located
in the center console bin, allows
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle. This is not an audio output;
do not plug headphones into the
auxiliary input jack.
Set up auxiliary devices while the
vehicle is stopped. See Defensive
Driving on page 8‑3 for more
information on driver distraction.
When a device is first connected
to the 3.5mm (1/8 in.) input jack
or the USB port (if equipped) the
infotainment system automatically
switches to that device. If an
auxiliary device has already been
connected, press the AUX or CD/
AUX button.

3.5mm Jack
Connect a 3.5mm (1/8 in.) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.

USB Supported Devices

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Use the portable
device to make additional volume
adjustments.
CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary):
Press to play a CD when a portable
audio device is playing. Press again
to start playing audio from the
connected portable audio player.
If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux Device”
displays.

USB Port
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.

6-35

USB Flash Drives

Portable USB Hard Drives

Fifth generation or later iPod*

First, Second, or Third
generation iPod nano*

iPod classic*

*For proper operation, make sure
the iPod has the latest firmware
from Apple®. The iPod firmware can
be updated using the latest iTunes
application. See www.apple.com/
itunes.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
Connect the USB storage device to
the USB port located in the center
console. Some USB devices may
not be supported.
Playing an MP3/WMA From a USB
Storage Device
See MP3 on page 6‑23 for more
information.

6-36

Infotainment System

Connecting an iPod
To connect the iPod, connect one
end of the special iPod connection
cable to the iPod’s dock connector.
Connect the other end to both the
USB port and the auxiliary input jack
located in the center console. The
USB port and the auxiliary input jack
are located in the center console
bin. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, a GM logo may
appear on the iPod. The iPod's
music information will be shown on
the radio’s display and the music
begins playing through the vehicles
audio system.
The iPod's battery charges while it
is connected to the vehicle and if
the ignition is turned to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. It can
also be left connected to the vehicle
after the vehicle is turned off. With
the vehicle turned off, the iPod will
automatically be powered off and
will not charge or draw power from
the vehicle's battery.

A standard iPod USB cable, like
the one that came with the iPod,
cannot be used to connect an iPod
to the vehicle. The special iPod
connection cable that came
equipped with the vehicle or that
was made available from your
dealer/retailer must be used to
command and control an iPod.
Use a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in.)
stereo cable to connect an older
iPod model that is not supported,
or if the special iPod connection
cable is missing. Command and
control of the iPod using the
infotainment control buttons and
knobs is not supported when only
a 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) stereo cable
is used.
Commanding and Controlling
an iPod
An iPod™ can be controlled by
using the radio buttons and knobs;
the song information shows on the
infotainment system's display.

To connect and control the iPod
using the radio controls, use the
special iPod connection cable that
came as standard equipment with
the vehicle as part of the USB
option. The special iPod connection
cable can also be purchased or
made available, from your dealer/
retailer. See your dealer/retailer for
more information.
Use the Menu/Select knob to bring
up the iPod Menu and select Songs,
Artists, Albums, Playlists and Audio
books to play from the iPod.
Disconnecting an iPod
To properly dismount the iPod USB
device before disconnecting from
the vehicle, press the softkey under
the EJECT tab on the infotainment
display screen during iPod
playback.

Infotainment System

Phone
Bluetooth
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls.
The system can be used while the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position. The range
of the Bluetooth system can be up
to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones
support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system.
See www.gm.com/bluetooth for
more information on compatible
phones.

Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.

Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through
the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and over-rides the audio
system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent
missed calls, a minimum volume
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.

6-37

Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑7 for more information.

b g (Push To Talk) : Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
speech recognition.
c ª (Phone On Hook): Press
to end a call, reject a call, or to
cancel an operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
must be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system first and then
connected to the vehicle before it
can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.

6-38

Infotainment System

Pairing Information:
.

Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system.

The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system
automatically links with the first
available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.

Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system at a time.

Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.

To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold
two seconds:

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four digit
PIN number. The PIN number
will be used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cellular phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name
for the phone. Use a name that
best describes the phone. This
name will be used to indicate
which phone is connected. The
system then confirms the name
provided.
6. The system responds with
“ has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.

Infotainment System
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press and hold
two seconds:
.

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all
the paired Bluetooth devices.
If a phone is connected to the
vehicle, the system will say “Is
connected” after the connected
phone.

Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold
two seconds:
.

b g for

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
which phone to delete followed
by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to
be deleted. If the phone name
is unknown, use the “List”
command for a list of all paired
phones. The system responds

6-39

with “Would you like to delete
? Yes or No”
followed by a tone
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
The system responds with “OK,
deleting ”.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold
two seconds:

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.

6-40

Infotainment System

3. Say “Change phone”. The
system responds with “Please
wait while I search for other
phones”.
.

If another phone is found,
the response will be
“ is now
connected”.

Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone
number to be stored without
entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold
two seconds:

Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty
phone numbers as name tags that
are shared between the Bluetooth
and OnStar systems.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
.

Store

Digit Store

Directory

If the system recognizes
the number it responds with
“OK, Storing” and repeats
the phone number.

If the system is unsure it
recognizes the phone
number, it responds with
“Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please
say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

If another phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.

3. Say the complete phone number
to be stored at once with no
pauses.

2. Say “Store”. The system
responds with “Store, number
please” followed by a tone.

4. After the system stores the
phone number, it responds with
“Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.

Infotainment System
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds with “About to store
. Does that
sound OK?”.
.

If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

2. Say “Digit Store”. The system
responds with “Please say the
first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored.
The system will repeat back the
digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
number to be stored is complete.
.

If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.

To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time and
the system will repeat them.

The digit store command allows a
phone number to be stored by
entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold
two seconds:
.

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

6-41

4. After the complete number has
been entered, say “Store”. The
system responds with “Please
say the name tag” followed by
a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds with “About to store
. Does that
sound OK?”.
.

If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.

If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.

6-42

Infotainment System

Using the Directory Command

Deleting Name Tags

The directory command lists all of
the name tags stored by the system.
To use the directory command:

The system uses the following
commands to delete name tags:

1. Press and hold
two seconds:
.

b g for

2. Say “Directory”. The system
responds with “Directory” and
then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is
complete, the system returns to
the main menu.

Delete

Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific
name tags to be deleted.

2. Say “Delete”. The system
responds with “Delete, please
say the name tag” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
The system responds with
“Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”.
.

If the name tag is correct,
say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system
responds with “OK, deleting
, returning to
the main menu.”

If the name tag is incorrect,
say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let's
try again, please say the
name tag.”

To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold
two seconds:

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

Infotainment System
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command
The delete all name tags command
deletes all stored phone book name
tags and route name tags for
OnStar (if present).
To use the delete all name tags
command:
1. Press and hold
two seconds:
.

2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The
system responds with “You are
about to delete all name tags
stored in your phone directory
and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want
to do this? Please say yes
or no.”
.

Say “Yes” to delete all
name tags.

Say “No” to cancel the
function and return to the
main menu.

b g for

Making a Call
Calls can be made using the
following commands:
.

Dial

Digit Dial

Call

Re-dial

6-43

Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds:

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
with “Dial using .
“Number please” followed by
a tone.

6-44

Infotainment System

3. Say the entire number without
pausing.
.

If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials
the number.
If the system does not
recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials
the number. If the number
is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds:
.

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system
responds with “Digit dial using
, please say the
first digit to dial” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at
a time. Following each digit, the
system will repeat back the digit
it heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the
number to be dialed is complete.
After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The
system responds with “OK,
Dialing” and dials the number.
.

If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.

To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time and
the system will repeat them.

Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds:

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

2. Say “Call”. The system responds
with “Call using .
Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.

Infotainment System
3. Say the name tag of the person
to call.
.

If the system clearly
recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling,
” and dials the
number.
If the system is unsure it
recognizes the right name
tag, it confirms the name
tag followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct,
say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, calling,
” and dials the
number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.

Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds:
.

b g for

2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The
system responds with “Re-dial
using ” and dials
the last number called from the
connected Bluetooth phone.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.

6-45

Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
.

Press b g and begin speaking
to answer the call.

Press

c ª to ignore a call.

Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
.

Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.

Press b g again to return to the
original call.

To ignore the incoming call,
continue with the original call
with no action.

Press c ª to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.

6-46

Infotainment System

Three-Way Calling

Muting a Call

Transferring a Call

Three-Way Calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.

During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.

Audio can be transferred between
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system and
the cell phone.

1. While on a call press b g . The
system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

To Mute a call

2. Say “Three-way call”. The
system responds with
“Three-way call, please say
dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b g to link all the callers
together.

Ending a Call
Press

c ª to end a call.

1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
The system responds with
“Resuming call”.

To Transfer Audio to the Cell
Phone
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system
responds with “Transferring call”
and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.

Infotainment System
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System

Voice Pass-Thru

The cellular phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position.

Voice Pass-Thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
This feature can be used to verbally
access contacts stored in the cell
phone.

1. During a call with the audio
on the cell phone, press and
hold b g for two seconds:

1. Press and hold
two seconds:

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the call
transfers to the Bluetooth
system.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The call then
transfers to the Bluetooth
system.

b g for

For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.

6-47

3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds with “OK, accessing
”.
.

The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers and numbers stored
as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system. Account numbers
can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu
driven calls.
Sending a number during a call
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
with “Say a number to send
tones” followed by a tone.

6-48

Infotainment System

3. Say the number to send.

3. Say the name tag to send.

If the system clearly
recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending
Number” and the dial tones
are sent and the call
continues.

If the system clearly
recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending
” and the dial
tones are sent and the call
continues.

If the system is not sure it
recognized the number
properly, it responds “Dial
Number, Please say yes or
no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Sending Number”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.

If the system is not sure it
recognized the name tag
properly, it responds “Dial
, Please say
yes or no?” followed by a
tone. If the name tag is
correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK,
Sending ” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The
system responds with “Say a
name tag to send tones”
followed by a tone.

Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phonebook and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
above sections on Deleting a Paired
Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for FCC information.

Climate Controls

7-1

Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control System

Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.

Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

A. Display

G. Air Delivery Mode Control

B. Fan Control
C. Power

H. Temperature Control and
Heated Seat

D. AUTO

E. PASS (Passenger Climate
Control)

J. Recirculation

F. Defrost

L. Rear Window Defogger

Air Conditioning

K. Outside Air

7-2

Climate Controls

Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls fan speed, air
delivery, and air conditioning in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature. When the
indicator light is on, the system is in
full automatic operation. If the air
delivery mode or fan setting is
manually adjusted, the auto
indicator turns off and displays will
show the selected settings.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a
comfortable setting between
21°C (70°F) and 27°C (80°F).
Choosing the coldest or warmest
temperature setting will not
cause the system to heat or cool
any faster.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold
weather, the system delays
turning on the fan until warm air
is available. The system starts
out blowing air at the floor, but
can automatically change modes

as the vehicle warms up to
maintain the chosen temperature
setting. The length of time
needed for warm up depends on
the outside temperature and the
length of time that has elapsed
since the vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate.
This may take from 10 to
30 minutes. Then adjust the
temperature, if necessary.
English can be changed to metric
units through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31.

Q / R (Temperature Control):
The temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the automatic temperature
settings.
PASS (Passenger Climate
Control): Press to set a different
temperature for the passenger.

Then adjust the passenger
temperature buttons to a
comfortable setting.
Pressing the PASS button again
automatically sets the passenger's
temperature to the driver's setting.
Turning the passenger's
temperature display off does not
shut the passenger's climate control
system off.
Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
When the climate control system is
turned off the air inlet defaults to
outside air.
D C (Fan Control):

Press the
buttons to increase or decrease the
fan speed. Pressing either button
cancels automatic fan control. Press
AUTO to return to automatic
operation. The blower may reduce
during an Onstar® session to limit
background noise.

Climate Controls
If the airflow seems low when the
fan speed is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air filter
might need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on
page 7‑6 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑3.

H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press the buttons to change the
direction of the airflow. The current
mode appears in the display screen.
Changing the mode cancels the
automatic air delivery. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation.
The outboard air outlets always
receive some airflow in every mode,
except defrost.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):

Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets. In

7-3

automatic operation, cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.

air-conditioning compressor, unless
the outside temperature is at or
below freezing.

[ (Floor):

This mode can also cause the fan
speed and air temperature to
increase.

Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield and outboard
outlets.

- (Defog):

This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor and
side window outlets. When this
mode is selected, the system turns
off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. If recirculation is
selected while in defog mode, it is
cancelled after 10 minutes.

0 (Defrost):

This mode clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield, with some air directed to
the side windows. In this mode, the
system automatically turns off
recirculation and runs the

# (Air Conditioning):

Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off and override the automatic
system. When in AUTO, the air
conditioning compressor comes on
automatically, as needed.
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air, so
water might drip under the vehicle
while idling or after turning off the
engine. This is normal.

M (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated inside
the vehicle. It helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle or prevent
outside air and odors from entering.
Press the auto button to have the
system select the best air delivery
mode for the temperature setting.

7-4

Climate Controls

Recirculation is not available in the
defrost mode and automatically
turns off 10 minutes after defog is
selected. This helps to limit window
fogging in the vehicle.
Using recirculation for long periods
of time could cause the air inside
the vehicle to become too dry or
stuffy. To prevent this from
happening, after the air in the
vehicle has cooled, select outside
air or press the auto button.

F (Outside Air):

Press to turn
on the outside air. An indicator light
turns on. The outside air mode pulls
fresh air from outside the vehicle.
Outside air is always selected in
defrost mode to prevent fogging.

Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog or frost
from the rear window. It only works
when the ignition is in ON/RUN.

= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.

The rear window defogger stays on
for about 15 minutes, before turning
off if the vehicle is moving at a
slower speed. At higher speeds, the
rear window defogger may stay on
continuously. With each additional
press, the defogger runs for about
10 minutes. The defogger can also
be turned off by turning off the
engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors
turn on when the rear window
defogger button is on and helps to
clear fog or frost from the surface of
the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on
page 1‑27.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
covered by your warranty.

z /{ (Heated and Ventilated
Seats): Press to heat or ventilate
the seat. See Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats on page 2‑9.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with
remote vehicle start, the climate
control system automatically heats
and cools the vehicle based on the
temperature inside and outside of
the vehicle. The climate control
displays will be blank. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 1‑12.
In cold weather the windshield
defroster and/or rear window
defogger automatically turn on.
If the vehicle has heated seats, they
will also turn on.
When the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN, the climate control system
returns to the settings used before
the vehicle was last turned off. The
heated seats will turn off,
if equipped.

Climate Controls
Sensors

7-5

Do not cover the sensors or the
automatic climate control system will
not work properly.
Air Quality Sensor
For vehicles with an air quality
sensor, the climate control system
adjusts to limit some exhaust fumes
from being pulled inside your
vehicle.

The solar sensor located on the
instrument panel, near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.

The interior temperature sensor
located on the instrument panel to
the right of the steering wheel,
measures the temperature of the air
inside the vehicle.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
adjust the fan speed and the air
delivery, in order to maintain the
selected temperature. The system
may also supply cooler air to the
side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be
activated, as necessary.

Press the AUTO button on the
climate control to activate the air
quality sensor. The recirculation
indicator light comes on when poor
quality air is detected. The air
quality sensor will not maintain
recirculation for an extended period
to prevent the air inside the vehicle
from becoming too dry or stuffy.

7-6

Climate Controls

Under certain conditions, the air
quality sensor will not activate
recirculation, such as during cold
weather or with odors, like skunk. To
limit odors manually, press M until
the condition has passed.
The air quality sensor system does
not protect against carbon monoxide
(CO), which you cannot see or
smell. See Engine Exhaust on
page 8‑25.

Air Vents
Use the air outlets located in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel to direct the
airflow. Use the thumbwheels near
the air outlets to open or close off
the airflow.
Operation Tips
.

Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.

Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.

Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the
outside of the vehicle.

Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The passenger compartment air
filter traps most of the dust and
pollen from the air entering the
vehicle. The filter will need to be
changed periodically. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑3.
Using the climate control system
without the passenger air filter
installed could let water or other
debris enter the system. This could
cause a water leak or noises. Make
sure a new air filter is installed after
removing the old one.

Climate Controls
To replace the passenger
compartment air filter:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers
and turn the ignition off again
when the wipers are straight up
on the windshield.

The passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood
below the windshield wiper arm
and the screen on the passenger
side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for more information
on location.

This allows access to the leaf
screen. The passenger
compartment air filter is located
under the screen.
3. Open the hood to access the
engine compartment. See Hood
on page 9‑5 for more
information.

7-7

4. Remove the three screws that
hold the screen in place and lift
off the screen by lifting and
sliding it toward the center of the
vehicle.
5. Pull out on the two tabs located
on each end of the filter cover.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling
it straight up.
7. Remove the old filter and insert
a new one.
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 10‑9 for the
correct part number for the filter.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to
reinstall the cover.

7-8

Climate Controls

2 NOTES

Driving and Operating

Driving and
Operating
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 8-9
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-12
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
Parking (Manual
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

Drive Systems
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-20
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-24

Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-26
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 8-30

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake (Manual) . . . . . .
Parking Brake (Electric) . . . . . .
Brake Assist
(Except CTS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-33
8-34
8-35
8-37

Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . .
Competitive Driving Mode . . .
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . .
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . .

8-37
8-38
8-40
8-40
8-41

Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-44
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

8-2

Driving and Operating

Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-50
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-50
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing
(Except CTS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing (CTS-V) . . . . . .
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.

Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.

Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.

Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.

When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control, if equipped.

8-54
8-54
8-58
8-59
8-59

Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60

Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.

Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.

Combine several trips into a
single trip.

Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.

Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.

Driving and Operating

Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
page 2‑11.

{ WARNING
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
.

Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.

8-3

Police records show that almost
40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.

Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.

The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.

Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.

Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system can
make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,

8-4

Driving and Operating

spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.

Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help
to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 8‑37.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.

Braking
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑26.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
three-fourths of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two
or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft).
That could be a lot of distance in
an emergency, so keeping enough
space between the vehicle and
others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.

Driving and Operating
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.

Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.

8-5

Speed Variable Assist Steering

Steering Tips

The vehicle has a steering system
that varies the amount of effort
required to steer the vehicle in
relation to the speed of the vehicle.

It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.

The amount of steering effort
required is less at slower speeds
to make the vehicle more
maneuverable and easier to park.
At faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like feel
to the steering. This provides
maximum control and stability.
If the vehicle seems harder to steer
than normal when parking or driving
slowly, there may be a problem with
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer
than normal at slow speeds. See
your dealer/retailer for service.

Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the
one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.

8-6

Driving and Operating

Steering in Emergencies

Off-Road Recovery

There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.

The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.

The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply
the brakes. See Braking on
page 8‑4. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.

If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front

Driving and Operating
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.

The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.

8-7

While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.

8-8

Driving and Operating

Competitive Driving
Competitive driving may affect the
vehicle warranty. See the warranty
book before using the vehicle for
competitive driving.
Notice: If you use your vehicle
for competitive driving, the
engine may use more oil than it
would with normal use. Low oil
levels can damage the engine. Be
sure to check the oil level often
during competitive driving and
keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper
operating range on the engine oil
dipstick. For information on how
to add oil, see Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.
CTS-V Only: For competitive
driving, it is recommended that the
brake fluid be replaced with a high
performance brake fluid that has
a dry boiling point greater than
279°C (534°F). After conversion to

the high performance brake fluid,
follow the brake fluid service
recommendations outlined by the
fluid manufacturer. Do not use
silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids.

Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.

Driving and Operating
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:

8-9

Keep the windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 9‑58.

Turn off cruise control.

Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:

Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Other driving tips include:
.

Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

Allow extra following distance.

Keep interior temperature cool.

Pass with caution.

Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.

Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.

Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.

Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.

Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.

Going down steep or long hills,
shift to a lower gear.

{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

8-10

Driving and Operating

{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.

Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.

Top of hills: Be
alert — something could be in
your lane (stalled car, accident).

Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.

Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 8‑33 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.

Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Service on page 12‑6. To get help
and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
.

Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.

Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.

WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.

Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.

Open a window about 5 cm
(two inches) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from
the wind to bring in fresh air.

Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.

Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)

{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
(Continued)

Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.

8-11

WARNING (Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the
engine off and close the window
most of the way to save heat.

8-12

Driving and Operating

Repeat this until help arrives but
only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving
about to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.

{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
shown on the speedometer.

If the Vehicle is Stuck

For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9‑81.

Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out

If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.

Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as

little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on
page 9‑108.

Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.

Driving and Operating
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.

Tire and Loading Information
Label

number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 9‑58 and Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66 .

{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.

8-13

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached near the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the

There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.

8-14

Driving and Operating

Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement

“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined

weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined

weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals

the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined

weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing (Except
CTS-V) on page 8‑58 or Trailer
Towing (CTS-V) on page 8‑59 for
important information on towing
a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.

Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and

Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).

Driving and Operating

8-15

seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label

Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(750 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =

113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @

91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =

0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to either the
driver's door edge or the lower
center pillar on the driver's side
of the vehicle. The label tells
the gross weight capacity of
the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

8-16

Driving and Operating

The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this
section.

WARNING (Continued)

These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.

Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.

{ WARNING

Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.

When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.

Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.

Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
.

Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
(Continued)

Driving and Operating

Starting and
Operating

Avoid downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle when the
engine speed will exceed
4000 RPM.

New Vehicle Break-In

Do not let the engine labor.
Never lug the engine in high
gear at low speeds. With a
manual transmission, shift to the
next lower gear. This rule
applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.

Follow these recommended
guidelines during the first
2 414 km/1,500 miles of driving
this vehicle. Parts have a break-in
period and performance will be
better in the long run.
For the first 2 414 km/1,500 miles:
.

Avoid full throttle starts and
abrupt stops.

Do not exceed 4,000
engine rpm.

Avoid driving at any one
constant speed, fast or slow.

Do not participate in track
events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during this
break–in period.

Check engine oil with every
refueling and add if necessary.
Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher than normal during the
first 2 414 km/1,500 miles.

8-17

To break in new tires, drive at
moderate speeds and avoid hard
cornering for the first 322 km/
200 miles. New tires do not have
maximum traction and may tend
to slip.

New brake linings also need a
break–in period. Avoid making
hard stops during the first
322 km/200 miles. This is
recommended every time brake
linings are replaced.

8-18

Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions
(Key Access)

The key can be turned to four
different positions.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force the
key from its cylinder could cause
damage or break the key. Use the
correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the
key is all the way in. If it is and
you have a manual transmission
vehicle, turn the steering wheel
left and right while you turn the
key hard. If none of this works,
then the vehicle needs service.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only
position in which the key can be
inserted or removed. This position
locks the ignition and shifter on
automatic transmission vehicles,
and the ignition and steering wheel
on manual transmission vehicles.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position lets you use things like the
radio and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off. This position
allows you to turn off the engine.

C (ON/RUN): This position is for
driving. It is the position the ignition
switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the key is released.
To shift the transmission out of
P (Park), the ignition key has to be
in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not start if the
battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the
engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the
driver door is opened, the ignition is
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
and the key is in the ignition.

Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access)
You can turn the ignition control
knob to four different positions.
To shift out of P (Park), ignition must
be in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.

Make sure the keyless access
transmitter is inside the vehicle
when trying to turn the ignition
control knob.

If you need to shift the transmission
out of P (Park), the ignition control
knob has to be in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

A (LOCK/OFF): The ignition control
knob cannot be removed from the
vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter must be inside the
vehicle to start the engine. This
position locks the ignition and shifter
on automatic transmission vehicles,
and the ignition and steering wheel
on manual transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained
if you leave the key in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off. You may not be
able to start your vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position allows you to use things
like the radio and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off. This
position will allow you to turn off the
engine.

Using a tool to force the ignition
control knob from its cylinder could
damage it.

8-19

C (ON/RUN): This position is for
driving. It is the position the ignition
switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the control knob is
released.

D (START): This position starts the
engine.

Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
.

Audio System

Power Windows

Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the audio system will
work up to 10 minutes or until
the driver door is opened.

8-20

Driving and Operating

Power to the windows or sunroof
will work up to 10 minutes or until
any door is opened. For an
additional 10 minutes of operation,
close all the doors and turn the key
to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.

Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the
proper gear.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, the keyless access
transmitter must be authenticated in
order for the ignition control knob to
turn. The transmitter can be
authenticated either by putting your
foot on the brake pedal or by
pushing the ignition control knob in.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.

If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, your foot must be
on the brake pedal to start the
engine. To rotate the ignition control
knob, put your foot on the brake
pedal and turn the ignition control
knob to the START position. If the
ignition control knob does not turn,
try pushing the knob in and turning
again. When the engine begins
cranking, let go of the ignition
control knob, it will return to the ON/
RUN position.

See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 1‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 1‑7 for more
information.

If the transmitter is not in the vehicle
or something is interfering with the
transmitter, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display Electronic
Key Not Detected. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for more information.

Manual Transmission

If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter needs replacing, the DIC
displays Replace Battery In Remote
Key. The vehicle can still be driven.

Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
The shift lever should be in neutral
position and the parking brake
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal
down to the floor and start the
engine. The vehicle will not start if
the clutch pedal is not all the
way down.

Driving and Operating
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. If the vehicle has the
keyless access system, push the
ignition control knob in and
rotate the knob to the START
position. When the engine starts,
let go of the ignition. The idle
speed will go down as your
engine gets warm. Do not race
the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow
the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for
a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in

START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition switch to
ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
5‐10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START

8-21

for up to a maximum of
15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, do the same
thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform
properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.

8-22

Driving and Operating

Engine Coolant Heater
Vehicles with the engine coolant
heater can use this option in
cold weather conditions at or
below −18°C (0°F) for easier
starting and better fuel economy
during engine warm-up. Plug in the
coolant heater at least four hours
before starting your vehicle.
An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist
which will prevent engine coolant
heater operation at temperatures
above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The cord is
located near the driver side strut
tower.
Remove the plastic cap to
access the plug.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
If you do not, it could be
damaged.
Contact your dealer/retailer for
information on how long to use the
heater in your particular area.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑54.
Use this procedure to shift into
P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 8‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 8‑35 for more
information.

Driving and Operating
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing the lever
all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. For vehicles with key access,
remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Vehicles with the keyless access
system, take the keyless access
transmitter with you.

Leaving the Vehicle With
the Engine Running
(Automatic Transmission)

{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking brake
set. After shifting into P (Park), try to
move the shift lever out without first
pushing the button on the shift lever.
If you can, the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock
(Automatic Transmission)
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when

8-23

parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is
designed to:
.

Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released, for vehicles
with key access.

8-24
.

Driving and Operating

Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the brake
pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 9‑103 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park) use the
following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever
button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service.

Parking (Manual
Transmission)
Before you get out of the vehicle,
place the shift lever in R (Reverse)
and firmly apply the parking brake.
For vehicles with the key access
ignition, turn the ignition key to
OFF/LOCK, and remove the key.
See Ignition Positions (Key Access)

on page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 8‑19 for
more information.
For vehicles with the keyless
access ignition, turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF and remove the keyless
access transmitter.
If you are towing a trailer, see
Trailer Towing (Except CTS-V) on
page 8‑58 or Trailer Towing
(CTS-V) on page 8‑59.

Parking Over Things
That Burn

{ WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.

Driving and Operating

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.

The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).

The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.

The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.

The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
.

There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.

Drive it only with the windows
completely down.

Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.

8-25

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.

8-26

Driving and Operating

{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 8‑22.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑54.

Automatic
Transmission

{ WARNING

The shift lever is located on the
center console between the front
seats.

It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.

There are several different positions
for the shift lever.

Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 8‑22. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑54.

P (Park): This position locks the
rear wheels. It is the best position to
use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
regular brakes first and then press

Driving and Operating
the shift lever button before you can
shift from P (Park) when the ignition
key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot
shift out of P (Park), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into P (Park) as
you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into
another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park on page 8‑23.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)
can be used to rock the vehicle
back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your
transmission. See If the Vehicle is
Stuck on page 8‑12 for additional
information.

N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart when the vehicle
is already moving, use N (Neutral)
only. You can also use N (Neutral)
when the vehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.

8-27

D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
.

Going less than 55 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.

Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
The transmission will shift down
to a lower gear and have more
power.

Downshifting the transmission in
slippery road conditions could result
in skidding, see Skidding under
Loss of Control on page 8‑7
While in D (Drive), the CTS-V
vehicle's first forward gear
automatic shift after starting the
vehicle will be from 1 (First).
Afterwards, the CTS-V vehicles will
always start in 2 (Second) gear.
While in M (Manual Mode), for
increased performance, the vehicle
will start in 1 (First) gear.

8-28

Driving and Operating

M (Manual Mode): This position
allows the driver to select the range
of gears appropriate for current
driving conditions. See Driver Shift
Control (DSC) later in this section.
Notice: Spinning the tires or
holding the vehicle in one place
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in
place.

Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC) or
Tap Shift
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
high RPMs without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission.
DSC can be enabled through the
shift lever or the Tap Shift controls,
located on the back of the steering
wheel (if equipped).
To use the DSC feature using the
shift lever:
1. Move the shift lever to the
right from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
Once in M (Manual Mode)
position, if you do not move the
shift lever forward or rearward,
the vehicle will be in sport mode.
When you are in sport mode
the vehicle will still shift
automatically. The transmission
may remain in a gear longer
than it would in the normal
driving mode based on braking,
throttle input, and vehicle lateral
acceleration.

SPORT MODE will be displayed
in the DIC momentarily.
The vehicle will remain in sport
mode if the shift lever is not
moved. Sport mode will shift
automatically but remain in a
gear longer then it would in
normal driving mode based on
braking and acceleration.
2. To go from sport mode to DSC,
move the shift lever forward to
upshift or rearward to downshift.
3. When in DSC, you can exit back
into sport mode by continuously
holding the shifter in the
upshift (forward) position for
approximately one second.

Driving and Operating
To use the DSC feature with
the steering wheel paddles
(if equipped):

3. When in DSC, you can exit back
into sport mode by continuously
holding the upshift paddle (right
hand side) for approximately
one second.

8-29

CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights
around the outside of the
tachometer as a performance
up-shift light. These tracers flash to
indicate when to shift to the next
higher gear to avoid the engine
speed limit. See Tachometer on
page 4‑17 for more information.
While using the DSC feature, the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker
shifting. You can use this for sport
driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear
longer, or to down shift for more
power or engine braking.

1. Move the shift lever to the
right from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
2. The paddles are on the back of
the steering wheel. Tap the left
paddle to downshift, and the
right paddle to upshift.

The tachometer display on the
instrument panel cluster will show
which gear the vehicle is in. The
number indicates the requested
gear range when moving the shift
lever forward or rearward. See
Tachometer on page 4‑17 for more
information on the odometer.

The transmission will only allow you
to shift into gears appropriate for
the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The
transmission will not automatically
shift to the next lower gear if the
engine RPM is too high, nor to the
next higher gear when the maximum
engine RPM is reached.

8-30

Driving and Operating

If shifting is prevented for any
reason, the currently selected gear
will flash multiple times, indicating
that the transmission has not
shifted gears.
While in the DSC mode, the CTS
automatic transmission will
automatically downshift when the
vehicle comes to a stop. This will
allow for more power during
acceleration.
The CTS-V automatic transmission
will not automatically downshift
on hard acceleration when in
DSC mode.
When accelerating the vehicle
from a stop in snowy and icy
conditions, you may want to shift
into second gear. A higher gear
allows the vehicle to gain more
traction on slippery surfaces.

Manual Transmission

CTS-V

If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, the shift lever is
located on the center console
between the front seats. The
following explains how to operate
the manual transmission.
CTS

1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
Shift into 1 (First) when you are
going less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
For CTS-V, shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 64 km/h
(40 mph ). If you come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift
into 1 (First), put the shift lever in
Neutral and let up on the clutch.
Press the clutch pedal back down.
Then shift into 1 (First).

Driving and Operating
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.

R (Reverse): To back up, press
down the clutch pedal, completely
stop the vehicle, and shift into
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and
6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the
same way you do for 2 (Second).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.

The CTS-V transmission prevents
you from easily shifting into
R (Reverse) using normal shifting
force while the vehicle is moving at
more than 5 km/h (3 mph), or when
the ignition is in LOCK/OFF.

To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.

Shift Speeds (Manual
Transmission)

Neutral: Use this position when
you start or idle your engine. Your
shift lever is in Neutral when it is
centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.

{ WARNING
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.

8-31

Notice: If you skip more than one
gear when you downshift, or if
you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while
downshifting, you could damage
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or
the transmission. Do not skip
gears or race the engine when
downshifting.
If the vehicle speed drops below
32 km/h (20 mph), or if the engine is
not running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear.
You may have to downshift two or
more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good
performance.

8-32

Driving and Operating

Up-Shift Light

CTS vehicles with a manual
transmission have an up-shift light
on the instrument panel. This light
shows when to shift to the next
higher gear for the best fuel
economy.
When this light comes on, you can
shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions
allow. For the best fuel economy,
accelerate slowly and shift when the
light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal
for the light to go on and off if you
quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when
you downshift.

Drive Systems

Skip Shift (CTS-V)

When using a compact spare tire on
an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on system, replace
the compact spare with a full-size
tire as soon as possible. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑102
for more information.

Under light acceleration, the
transmission will only allow you to
shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth).
Shifts from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or
3 (Third) are not allowed. This helps
improve fuel mileage.
Under harder acceleration, Skip
Shift is disabled, and the driver has
all gears available.

All-Wheel Drive
With this feature, engine power is
always sent to all four wheels. It is
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.

Driving and Operating

Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 4‑27.

If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,

8-33

there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. The ABS pump or motor
might be heard operating, and the
brake pedal might be felt to pulsate,
but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.

8-34

Driving and Operating

Parking Brake (Manual)

If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light on the
instrument panel cluster should
come on. If it does not, you need to
have the vehicle serviced. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 4‑26 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
A warning chime will sound if the
parking brake is set, the ignition is
on, and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing
(Except CTS-V) on page 8‑58 or
Trailer Towing (CTS-V) on
page 8‑59 for more information.

The parking brake pedal is located
on the lower portion of the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
To set the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down, then push the
parking brake pedal down.

To release the parking brake, pull
the release lever located to the left
of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel.

Driving and Operating

Parking Brake (Electric)

The system has two warning lights
and five Driver Information Center
(DIC) messages. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑26 and
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for more information. In
case of insufficient electrical power,
the EPB cannot be applied or
released.

{ WARNING
On vehicles with a manual
transmission, releasing the clutch
and pressing the accelerator will
release the Electric Parking
Brake. If the vehicle is not in a
gear, the vehicle could move, and
you or others could be injured.
Make sure the vehicle is in a gear
before attempting to drive away.
To avoid unexpected vehicle
movement, do not partially
release the clutch or press the
accelerator pedal until you are
ready to release the parking
brake and drive away.

8-35

EPB Apply
Vehicles with the electric parking
brake (EPB) have a switch in the
center console.
The EPB takes the place of the
manual parking brake system, the
foot pedal and release handle. The
EPB can always be activated, even
if the ignition is OFF. To avoid
draining the battery, do not operate
the EPB too often without the
engine running.

The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the BRAKE light will be on, and the
DIC message “Park Brake Set” will
be displayed. While the brake is
being applied, the status light will
flash until full apply is reached.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, you need to
have the vehicle serviced. Do not
drive the vehicle if the BRAKE light
is flashing. See your dealer/retailer.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑26 for more information.

8-36

Driving and Operating

If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
sound, and the DIC message
“Release Park Brake Switch” will be
displayed. The vehicle will
decelerate as long as the switch is
held in the up position. Releasing
the EPB switch during the
deceleration will release the parking
brake. If the switch is held in the up
position until the vehicle comes to a
stop, the EPB will remain applied.
If the BRAKE light is on, either the
EPB is applied, or there is a failure
in the hydraulic brake system.
If this light is flashing continuously,
the EPB is only partially applied or
released, or there is a problem with
the EPB. The DIC message
“Service Park Brake” will be
displayed. If this light is flashing
continuously, release the EPB, and
attempt to apply it again. If this light
continues to flash, do not drive the
vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.

If the yellow light is on, the EPB has
detected an error in another system
and is operating with reduced
functionality. To apply the EPB when
this light is on, lift up on the EPB
switch and hold it in the up position.
Full application of the parking brake
by the EPB system may take a
longer period of time than normal
when this light is on. Continue to
hold the switch until the BRAKE
light remains on. If the yellow light is
on, see your dealer/retailer.
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
wheels should be blocked to
prevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release
To release the EPB, turn the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position,
apply and hold the brake pedal,
and push down momentarily on the
EPB switch. If you attempt to
release the EPB without the brake
pedal applied, a chime will sound,
and the DIC message “Step On
Brake to Release Park Brake” will

be displayed. The EPB is released
when the BRAKE light is off and the
DIC message “Park Brake
Released” is displayed.
If the yellow light is on, the EPB has
detected an error in another system
and is operating with reduced
functionality. To release the EPB
when this light is on, push down on
the EPB switch and hold it in the
down position. EPB release may
take a longer period of time than
normal when this light is on.
Continue to hold the switch until the
BRAKE light is off. If the yellow light
is on, see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the red
brake warning light is off before
driving.

Driving and Operating
Automatic EPB Release
The EPB will automatically release if
the vehicle is running, placed into
gear and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when the EPB is applied, to
preserve park brake lining life.
The EPB can also be used to
prevent roll back for vehicles with a
manual transmission taking off on a
hill. In a situation where no roll back
is desired, an applied EPB will allow
both feet to be used for the clutch
and accelerator pedals in
preparation for starting the vehicle
moving in the intended direction.
In this situation, perform the normal
clutch and/or accelerator actions
required to begin moving the
vehicle. There is no need to push
the switch to release the EPB.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing
(Except CTS-V) on page 8‑58 or
Trailer Towing (CTS-V) on
page 8‑59 for more information.

Brake Assist
(Except CTS-V)
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.

8-37

Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel
spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. On a
rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system
operates if it senses that one or
both of the rear wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. On an
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the
system will operate if it senses that
any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system brakes the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.

8-38

Driving and Operating
or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
on page 8‑12 for more information.
See Winter Driving on page 8‑10
for information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.

StabiliTrak System

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
flashes when the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
comes on if there is a problem
with the traction control system.
When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning
light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 4‑28 for more information.
TCS automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started.
To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on, but it may
be necessary to turn the system off
if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect your
vehicle's performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 9‑3 for more information.

The TCS/StabiliTrak button is
located on the instrument
panel (CTS) or the steering
wheel (CTS-V).
Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button and the traction
control system will turn off and the
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will
come on. Press the button again
to turn the system back on. For
information on turning StabiliTrak
off and on, see StabiliTrak System
following.

The vehicle has an electronic
stability control system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the
system senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.

Driving and Operating

When the system activates, the
Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak warning light flashes on
the instrument panel. A noise may
be heard or a vibration may be felt
in the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
If there is a problem detected
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
STABILITRAK displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) and
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
comes on the instrument panel
cluster. When this message and

warning light displays, the system is
not operational. Driving should be
adjusted accordingly. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 and Messages and
Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light on page 4‑28 for
more information.

The TCS/StabiliTrak button is
located on the instrument
panel (CTS) or the steering
wheel (CTS-V).

8-39

StabiliTrak comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started.
The system should be left on to help
assist with directional control of the
vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to be
turned off, press and hold the
TCS/StabiliTrak button until the
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes
on and STABILITRAK OFF comes
on the DIC. More steering effort is
required when the system is
turned off.
If cruise control is being used when
the StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow,
reengage the cruise control.
See Cruise Control on page 8‑41
for more information.

8-40

Driving and Operating

Competitive Driving Mode
Competitive Driving Mode
To select this optional handling
mode, press the TCS/StabiliTrak
button quickly two times and
STABILITRAK COMPETITIVE
MODE displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). While in
the StabiliTrak Competitive Mode,
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
comes on, TCS does not limit wheel
spin, and more effort is required to
turn the steering wheel. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
again, or turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY and restart the
vehicle, to turn TCS back on and
turn the TCS/StabiliTrak warning
light off.

Notice: When traction control is
turned off, or Competitive Driving
Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to
shift with the drive wheels
spinning with a loss of traction, it
is possible to cause damage to
the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused
by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book
for additional information.

Magnetic Ride Control
With this feature on the CTS-V, the
Magnetic Ride Control system
adjusts the ride of the vehicle to
Touring or Sport modes. Magnetic
Ride Control monitors the
suspension system to determine the
proper system response.

TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
SPORT: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to road
conditions.
The setting can be changed at any
time. Based on road conditions,
steering wheel angle and the
vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide the
best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Touring and Sport
modes will feel similar on a smooth
road. Select a new setting whenever
driving conditions change.

Driving and Operating
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
briefly displays SUSPENSION
MODE TOURING or SUSPENSION
MODE SPORT on vehicle startup or
when a new mode is selected.

Press and release this button,
located in the center of the
instrument panel, to change modes.

Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
can give more traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. When
traction is low, this feature allows
the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.

Cruise Control

{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more
can be maintained without keeping

8-41

your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control turns off.
If the vehicle has the Stabilitrak®
system and begins to limit wheel
spin while you are using cruise
control, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. See
StabiliTrak System on page 8‑38.
When road conditions allow you to
safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.

8-42

Driving and Operating
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set
the speed or make the vehicle
decelerate.

[ (Cancel):

Press to cancel cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.

WARNING (Continued)
You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to
use cruise control.

Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the
parking brake is set, or if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
CTS Shown, CTS-V Similar
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.

I (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on or off. The indicator light
on the button turns on when cruise
control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.

The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.

{ WARNING
If you leave your cruise control on
when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to.
(Continued)

1. Press the

I button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located
on the steering wheel and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at
a desired speed and then the brake
is applied. This shuts off the cruise
control. But it does not need to be
reset.
Once the vehicle is driving at about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the
+RES button on the steering wheel.

Driving and Operating
The vehicle goes back to the
previously set speed and stays
there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
To increase the cruise speed while
using cruise control:
.

Press and hold the +RES button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
To increase vehicle speed in
small increments, press the
+RES button. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
To reduce the vehicle's speed while
using cruise control:
.

Press and hold the SET– button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.

To slow down in very small
amounts, press the SET– button
on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle's speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previously
set cruise speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle's
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle's speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle's speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control
turns off.

8-43

Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to end cruise
control:
.

Step lightly on the brake pedal
(manual and automatic
transmissions).

Press the clutch pedal to the
floor (manual transmissions).

Press

[ on the steering wheel.
Press I on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed
memory is erased when the cruise
control or the ignition is turned off.

8-44

Driving and Operating

Object Detection
Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
it assists the driver with parking
and avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). URPA operates at
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
and the sensors on the rear bumper
detect objects up to 2.4m (8 ft.)
behind the vehicle, and at least
25.4 cm (10 in.) off the ground.

{ WARNING
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
.

Objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle

Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper care
before and while backing; vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.

The display uses three color-coded
lights to provide distance and
system information and is located
above the rear window. It can be
seen by looking over your right
shoulder.

Driving and Operating
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically and
the display briefly illuminates to
indicate the system is working
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse).

The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle
gets closer to a detected object:
Description

Metric

English

amber light

2.4 m

8 ft.

amber/amber lights

1.0 m

40 in.

If the vehicle is traveling faster then
8 km/h (5 mph) in reverse, the red
light on the rear display flashes.

amber/amber/red lights and
continuous beeping for
five seconds

0.6 m

23 in.

Objects must be at least 25.4 cm
(10 in.) off the ground and below
trunk level, and within 2.4m (8 ft.)
from the rear bumper to be
detected. The distance may be less
during warmer or humid weather.

amber/amber/red lights flashing
and continuous beeping for
five seconds

0.3 m

1 ft.

A single beep sounds the first time
an object is detected between
1.0 m (40 in.) and 2.4m (8 ft.) away.
Beeping occurs continuously when
the vehicle is 0.6 m (23 in.) or closer
to an object.

8-45

The system can be disabled through
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Park Assist” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑51 for
more information.

8-46

Driving and Operating

When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate
due to a temporary condition, the
message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light
will be shown on the rear URPA
display when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). This
occurs under the following
conditions:
.

The driver disables the system.

The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 9‑110.

A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or a bicycle or an object
was hanging out of the trunk
during the last drive cycle, the
red light may illuminate in the
rear display. Once the attached
object is removed, URPA will
return to normal operation.

A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.

The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer to repair the
system.

Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.

If the system is still disabled after
driving forward at least 25 km/h
(15 mph), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.

Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
Camera system. Read this entire
section before using it.
The rear vision camera system is
designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
.

Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.

Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
(Continued)

Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
So if you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could hit
a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the
vehicle.

Vehicles Without a Navigation
System
When the key is in the ON/RUN
position and the driver shifts the
vehicle into R (Reverse), the video
image automatically appears on the
inside rear view mirror. Once the
driver shifts out of R (Reverse),

the video image automatically
disappears from the inside rear
view mirror.

Vehicles With a Navigation
System
When the driver shifts the vehicle
into R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the
navigation screen. Once the driver
shifts out of R (Reverse), the
navigation screen will go back to the
last screen that had been displayed,
after a delay.

8-47

Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera
System: This message can display
when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other
vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a
problem persists, see your dealer/
retailer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The delay that is received after
shifting out of R (Reverse) is
approximately 5 seconds. The delay
can be cancelled by performing one
of the following:
.

Shifting in to P (Park).

Reach a vehicle speed of
8 km/h (5 mph).

There may be a message on the
rear vision camera screen that
states “Check Surroundings for
Safety”.

The camera is located above the
license plate.

8-48

Driving and Operating
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly

The area displayed by the camera is
limited and does not display objects
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper. The area
displayed can vary depending on
vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen
differs from the actual distance.

The rear vision camera system
might not work properly or display a
clear image if:

The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.

A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.

It is dark.

The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly into
the camera lens.

Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.

The back of the vehicle is in an
accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer/retailer.

There are extreme temperature
changes.

Driving and Operating

8-49

The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
page 11‑1.

Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.

Recommended Fuel
If the vehicle has a V6 engine, use
regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher.
If the octane rating is less than 87,
an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.

Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.

The 8th digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code P), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. For
best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 93. In an
emergency, you can use regular

8-50

Driving and Operating

unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane
fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such
as wide open throttle applications.
You might also hear audible spark
knock during acceleration. Refill the
tank with premium fuel as soon as
possible to avoid damaging the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at 91
octane or higher, the engine needs
service.

Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification D 4814
in the United States or CAN/
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 8‑50 for additional
information.

California Fuel
Requirements

Fuels in Foreign
Countries

If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑23. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.

If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.

Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.

Driving and Operating
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean,
or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change,
can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only

gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer/retailer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.

8-51

Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer/retailer for service.

8-52

Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank

Lamp could turn on. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑23.

{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling the
vehicle. This is against the law in
some places. Do not re-enter the
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep
children away from the fuel pump;
never let children pump fuel.

{ WARNING

The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.

Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.

While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible.
See Exterior Care on page 9‑110.

When reinstalling the cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks once,
otherwise the Malfunction Indicator

When replacing the fuel cap, turn
it clockwise until it clicks once.
Make sure the cap is fully installed.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.

Driving and Operating
The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑23.

{

WARNING

If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer/
retailer. The wrong type fuel cap
might not fit properly, might
cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light, and could damage
the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4‑23.

Filling a Portable Fuel
Container

{ WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
.

Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.

Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)

8-53

WARNING (Continued)
.

Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.

Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.

Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.

8-54

Driving and Operating

Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer/retailer or
trailering retailer for assistance with
preparing the vehicle for towing a
trailer.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.

For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips”.

For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing”.

For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment”.

For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 9‑108. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another

vehicle — such as a motorhome,
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 9‑108.

Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips

{ WARNING
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer
with the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle, see
Trailer Towing (Except CTS-V) on
page 8‑58 or Trailer Towing
(CTS-V) on page 8‑59. Trailering
changes handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel
economy. With the added weight,
the engine, transmission, wheel
assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder and under greater
loads. The trailer also adds wind
resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements. For safe trailering,
correctly use the proper trailering
equipment.
The following information has
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.

Driving and Operating
Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:
.

There are many laws, including
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.

Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.

During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.

Vehicles with automatic
transmissions can tow in D
(Drive) but M (Manual Mode) is
recommended. See Manual
Mode on page 8‑28 for more
information. Use a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often.
For vehicles with a manual
transmission, it is better not to
use the highest gear.

Use the cruise control when
towing.

Obey speed limit restrictions.
Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.

8-55

Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.

Towing with a Stability Control
System
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.

8-56

Driving and Operating

Following Distance

Making Turns

Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.

Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.

Passing

When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so
the trailer won't strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.

More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.

Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel
flash whenever signaling a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may
think other drivers are seeing the
signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before starting down a long
or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission can tow in D (Drive).
Shift the transmission to a lower
gear if the transmission shifts too
often under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is better not
to use the highest gear.

Driving and Operating
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this,
let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. For vehicles with manual
transmissions, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission out of
gear and the parking brake applied,
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 9‑23.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission, or into gear for
vehicles with a manual
transmission. Turn the wheels
into the curb if facing downhill or
into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.

8-57

3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park) for vehicles with an
automatic transmission or into
gear for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
.

Start the engine,

Shift into a gear, and

Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.

8-58

Driving and Operating

Maintenance When Trailer
Towing

Trailer Towing
(Except CTS-V)

The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during
the trip.

Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:

Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 9‑23.

The weight of the trailer.

The weight of the trailer tongue.

The total weight on the vehicle's
tires.

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
450 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
Speed, altitude, road grades,
outside temperature, special
equipment, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry
must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our
trailering information or advice,
or write us at our Customer
Assistance Offices. See Customer
Assistance Offices on page 12‑3
for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in

Driving and Operating
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12
for more information about the
vehicle's maximum load capacity.

After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.

Towing Equipment

Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires

The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.

Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
hitch is removed. If the holes are
not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 8‑25.

Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These
numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12. Do not
go over the GVW limit for the
vehicle, or the GAWR, including the
weight of the trailer tongue.

Trailer Towing (CTS-V)
The vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to tow a trailer.
For a weight-carrying hitch, the
trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).

8-59

Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer/retailer or a hitch
dealer for assistance.

8-60

Driving and Operating

Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.

Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer/
retailer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle and the damage would
not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other
components from working as
they should.

Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑40 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑40.

Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 9-12
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 9-25
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-31
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-33

Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

9-1

Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
License Plate Lamp
(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
License Plate Lamp
(Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . .
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . .

9-40
9-41
9-41
9-45
9-48
9-51
9-53
9-55

9-2

Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . .
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-58
9-59
9-59
9-60
9-62
9-63
9-66
9-67
9-68
9-69
9-73
9-73
9-74
9-75
9-77
9-78

Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Sedan) . . . . 9-92
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Wagon) . . . 9-93
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 9-102

Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103

Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108

Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-110
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114

General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer/retailer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:

Vehicle Care

California Proposition
65 Warning

Accessories and
Modifications

Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories to the vehicle can affect
vehicle performance and safety,
including such things as airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.

California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.

Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.

9-3

GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize
the vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑40.

9-4

Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work

{ WARNING
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.

Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
.

Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle

than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑12.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Check on page 2‑42.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
page 10‑11.

Vehicle Care

Hood
To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever with
this symbol on it. It is located
inside the vehicle on the lower
left side of the instrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the
vehicle and find the secondary
hood release lever. The lever is
located under the front edge of
the grille near the center. Push
the release lever up and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then pull the hood down and
close it firmly.

9-5

9-6

Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview
CTS 3.6 L V6 Engine shown, 3.0 L V6 Engine similar

Vehicle Care
A. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑25.
B. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS) on page 9‑41 or
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V) on page 9‑45 or
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Wagon) on
page 9‑48.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑103.
D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑103.
E. Passenger Compartment Air
Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on
page 7‑6.
F. Engine Cooling Fan. See
Cooling System on page 9‑18.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(Under Engine Cover). See
Power Steering Fluid on
page 9‑25.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.
I.

Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.

J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
(If Equipped) (Not Shown).
See Hydraulic Clutch on
page 9‑14.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
(Out of View). See Brakes on
page 9‑26.
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑18.
M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑15.

9-7

9-8

Vehicle Care

CTS-V 6.2 L V8 Engine

Vehicle Care
A. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑25.

H. Intercooler System Pressure
Cap. See Cooling System on
page 9‑18.

B. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS) on page 9‑41 or
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V) on page 9‑45 or
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Wagon) on
page 9‑48.

C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑103.
D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑103.

Engine Cover
Engine Cover (CTS)

Engine Cooling Fans. See
Cooling System on page 9‑18.

J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
(If Equipped) (Not Shown).
See Hydraulic Clutch on
page 9‑14.
K. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 9‑26.
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑18.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.

M. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(Under Engine Cover). See
Power Steering Fluid on
page 9‑25.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.

N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑15.

G. Passenger Compartment
Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on
page 7‑6.

9-9

To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).
2. Raise the right front corner of
engine cover (B) to release from
the ball stud.
3. Pull the engine cover (B) forward
to slide the rear tabs (C) out from
under the retainers.

9-10

Vehicle Care

4. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to
reinstall engine cover.

Engine Cover (CTS-V)

1. Raise the front of engine
cover (A) to release from the
ball studs (B).
2. Pull the engine cover forward
until clear of the smaller piece.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall engine cover.

Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil

To remove:
The engine cover consists of
two pieces. Only the larger front
piece needs to be removed to
access the engine oil and power
steering fill caps.

It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must
be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick,
add at least one liter/quart of the
recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2.

Vehicle Care
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil that
the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows
the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.

American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol

GM4718M
This vehicle's engine requires a
special oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM
standard. Use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: Using oils that do not
have the GM4718M Standard
designation can cause engine
damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
.

9-11

SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on
an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not
use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst
symbol on the container. This
symbol indicates that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
This vehicle's engine was filled at
the factory with a Mobil 1® synthetic
oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.

9-12

Vehicle Care

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding
oil to maintain engine oil level, oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add
substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30
with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not
meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil
change.

Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with the
starburst symbol that meet GM
standards are all that is needed for
good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished,
it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A “Change Engine
Oil Soon” message comes on.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑40. Change the oil as
soon as possible within the next
1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible

that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might
not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained
service people who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset
the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at
the proper level.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.

Vehicle Care
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
If the “Change Engine Oil Soon”
message is not on, the system is
reset.
The system is reset when the
“Change Engine Oil Soon” message
is off.

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains elements
that can be unhealthy for your skin
and could even cause cancer. Do
not let used oil stay on your skin.
Clean your skin and nails with soap
and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing
or rags. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and
disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.

9-13

Automatic Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department
and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
There is a special procedure for
checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, it should be
done at the dealer/retailer service
department. Contact your dealer/
retailer for additional information or
the procedure can be found in the
service manual. To purchase a
service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑12.

9-14

Vehicle Care

Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑3, and
be sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.

Manual Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer/
retailer for service. Have it repaired
as soon as possible. You may also
have the fluid level checked by your
dealer/retailer when the oil is
changed. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7 for
the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly
check clutch fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak in the
system. Adding fluid will not correct
a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What
to Use

The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir
cap has this symbol on it. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for reservoir location.

Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule for the proper fluid to use.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7. The fluid
requires changing every two years.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑3.

How to Check and Add Fluid
Visually check the clutch fluid
reservoir to make sure the fluid level
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
side of the reservoir. The hydraulic
clutch fluid system should be closed
and sealed.
Do not remove the cap to check
the fluid level or to top-off the fluid
level. Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line.

Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle, near the front.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for more information
on location.

When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑3 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.

9-15

How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
To inspect or replace the engine
air cleaner/filter:
1. Turn the ignition off.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the air box.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp
holding the air outlet duct in
place. Do not remove the clamp.
Move the duct aside.
5. Remove the hose from the air
cleaner housing mounting arm.
Move the hose aside.

2. Remove the side cover by
pulling up on the front of the
cover.

9-16

Vehicle Care

6. Remove the three air cleaner
housing cover screws.

7. Move the air cleaner housing
cover and remove the cover
from the air cleaner housing.

8. Remove the air cleaner filter
from the air cleaner housing.

Vehicle Care
How to Reinstall Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter

4. Install the air cleaner housing
cover screws.

1. Install the air cleaner into the air
cleaner housing. The outer air
cleaner filter seal must be fitted
properly in the air cleaner
housing.

5. Install the hose to the air cleaner
housing mounting arm. The hose
must be routed correctly.

2. Align the air cleaner housing
cover tabs to the air cleaner
housing.

7. Tighten the air cleaner outlet
duct screw clamp.

3. Install the air cleaner housing
cover.

6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct
to the air cleaner housing.

8. Attach the electrical connector to
the air box.
9. Reinstall the side cover.

9-17

{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.

9-18

Vehicle Care

Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
When you decide it is safe to lift the
hood, here is what you will see:

{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)
(Out of View)
B. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap

Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle
for all engines and the intercooler
is filled with DEX-COOL®. This
coolant is designed to remain in the
vehicle for five years or 240 000 km
(150,000 miles), whichever occurs
first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 9‑23.

Vehicle Care
What to Use

{ WARNING
Adding only plain water to
the cooling system can be
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch
fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
.

Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.

Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.

Protects against rust and
corrosion.

Will not damage aluminum parts.

Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.

Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.

9-19

Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
The engine coolant reservoir is
located in the engine compartment
on the driver side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the surge tank. If the coolant inside
the surge tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant
level is not at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done.
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18
for more information.

9-20

Vehicle Care

If the engine is warm or hot, the
coolant level should be at or above
the FROID/FULL COLD line on the
side of the coolant surge tank. If the
engine is cold, the coolant level
should be near the FROID/FULL
COLD line on the side of the coolant
surge tank. If it is not, there could
be a leak in the cooling system.

How to Add Coolant to the
Surge Tank

{ WARNING
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.

{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank.
If no coolant is visible in the surge
tank, add coolant as follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise about
one-quarter turn and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left.

Vehicle Care

9-21

By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the
FROID/FULL COLD line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
2. Then keep turning the pressure
cap slowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture, to slightly
above the FROID/FULL COLD
line on the side of the coolant
surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. The upper radiator
hose is the top hose coming out
of the radiator, on the passenger
side of the vehicle. Watch out for
the engine cooling fans.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Recheck the coolant level in the
bottle next time you use your
vehicle to insure the system is full
when cold. See Engine Coolant on
page 9‑18.

9-22

Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant in the
Intercooler System (CTS-V)
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.

Adding Coolant to the
Intercooler System
Coolant (CTS-V)

The super charged engine
intercooler coolant fill neck is
located in the engine compartment
on the passenger side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 9‑6.
On the coolant fill neck, there is
a cold fill region between the
two horizontal lines shown.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant fill neck. If the coolant
is not visible or below the cold fill
region in the fill neck, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant fill bottle, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this
is done.

1. Remove the intercooler system
pressure cap when the
intercooler system hoses are no
longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. This allows any pressure
still left to be vented.

2. Then keep turning the pressure
cap slowly and remove it.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture to the fill neck
until the coolant is within the
cold fill region.
With the intercooler system
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run for a couple
of minutes. Then turn the engine
off. By this time, the coolant
level inside the fill neck may be
lower. If the level drops where
coolant is no longer within the
cold fill region of the fill neck
with the engine off, add more of
the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the fill neck until the level is
again visible in the cold fill
region.
4. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.

Vehicle Care
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
If the coolant is not at the proper
level when the system cools down
again, see your dealer/retailer.

Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
There are two engine hot messages
that may be displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for more information.
You may decide not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Service on
page 12‑6.

If you do decide to lift the hood ,
make sure the vehicle is parked on
a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, the fan(s)
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
because of being driven with no
coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.

9-23

If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment

{ WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.

9-24

Vehicle Care

If No Steam Is Coming From
The Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.

Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

Stops after high-speed driving.

Idles for long periods in traffic.

Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gage
is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front
of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.

Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place
in an emergency. Should a hot
engine condition exist, an overheat
protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is a loss in power
and engine performance. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a
trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.

Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid

How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.

See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
power steering fluid reservoir.

When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the
system or you hear an unusual
noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the
HOT and COLD marks. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.

9-25

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Always use the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid
What to Use
When adding windshield washer
fluid to the vehicle, be sure to read
the manufacturer's instructions
before use. If you will be operating
your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

9-26

Vehicle Care

Adding Washer Fluid
The Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the
fluid level is low. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑31 for more information.

Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:
.

When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.

Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.

Fill the washer fluid tank
only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This
allows for fluid expansion if
freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is
completely full.

Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.

Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake
wear warning sound is heard,
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.

Vehicle Care
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.

Brake Adjustment

Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake
pedal does not return to normal
height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a
sign that brake service might be
required.

9-27

Brake Fluid

Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.

The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.

The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.

9-28
.

Vehicle Care

A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic
system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑26.

Notice:
.

Using the wrong fluid
can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the
brake hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.

If brake fluid is spilled
on the vehicle's painted
surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.

What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.

{ WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in
the brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.

Vehicle Care

Battery
The battery is in the trunk, behind
the trim panel, on the passenger
side of the vehicle. Refer to the
replacement number shown on the
original battery label when a new
battery is needed.

{ DANGER
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.

After a power loss, such as
disconnecting the battery or
removing the maxi fuses in the
power distribution fuse block, the
following steps must be performed
to calibrate the electronic throttle
control. If this is not done, the
engine will not run properly.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Do not start the engine.
2. Leave the ignition in ON/RUN for
at least three minutes so that the
electronic throttle control will
cycle and re-learn its home
position.
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Start and run the engine for at
least 30 seconds.

9-29

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 9‑103 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.

9-30

Vehicle Care

All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle is equipped with
all-wheel-drive, this is an additional
system that needs lubrication.

some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten
the plug.

Transfer Case

What to Use

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine what kind of lubricant
to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7.

It is not necessary to regularly
check the transfer case fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss
could indicate a problem. Have it
inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

Rear Axle
A. Drain Plug

When to Check Lubricant

B. Fill Plug

It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss
could indicate a problem. Have it
inspected and repaired.

To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
If the level is below the bottom of
the filler plug hole, located on the
transfer case, you'll need to add

Vehicle Care
How to Check Lubricant

What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine what kind of lubricant
to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
If the level is below the bottom of
the filler plug hole, located on the
rear axle, you'll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.

When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 8‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 8‑35.

9-31

Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. For automatic transmission
vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
For manual transmission
vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal
is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer/retailer for
service.

9-32

Vehicle Care

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
System Check

{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.

3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do not
start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try to
move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer/retailer for
service.

Ignition Transmission
Lock Check

1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.

While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 8‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 8‑35.

The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).

With the key access ignition
system, the ignition key should
come out only in LOCK/OFF.

Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.

See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 8‑18 or
Ignition Positions (Keyless
Access) on page 8‑19.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.

Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check

{ WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.

Vehicle Care
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
.

To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.

9-33

Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑3.
It is a good idea to clean or replace
the wiper blade assembly on a
regular basis or when worn. For
proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑9.
To replace the wiper blade
assembly:

4. Lift up the wiper blade
assembly cap.

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.

5. Pull the wiper blade assembly
down far enough to release it
from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.

2. Turn on the windshield wipers
and turn them off again when
the wipers are in the out-wipe
position. The driver side blade
will be straight up and down on
the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.

Allowing the wiper blade arm
to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield.
Any damage that occurs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm
to touch the windshield.

9-34

Vehicle Care

6. Replace the blade with a
new one.

Headlamp Aiming

Be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall.

The vehicle has a visual optical
headlamp aiming system. The aim
has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.

Not have any snow, ice, or mud
on it.

However, if the vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.

Be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp
aiming is being performed.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high
beams at you, this may also mean
the vertical aim needs to be
adjusted.

Normally loaded with a full
tank of fuel and one person or
75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on the
driver seat.

Have all tires properly inflated.

If your vehicle has a spare tire,
ensure the spare tire is in its
original location in the vehicle.

7. Reinstall the wiper blade
assembly by sliding it over the
wiper arm to engage the
J-hooked end. Pull up on the
assembly to lock it into place.

It is recommended that the vehicle
is taken to your dealer/retailer for
service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to
re-aim the headlamps as described.

8. Repeat the steps for the other
wiper.

The vehicle should:
.

Be placed so the headlamps
are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a light
colored wall.

Have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the way
to the wall.

Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.

Vehicle Care

9-35

To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5 for more information.

High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps
Halogen Headlamps

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
the low-beam headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low-beam headlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
the width of the vehicle at the
wall where it was marked in
Step 4.

9-36

Vehicle Care

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the
headlamp being aimed to be
seen on the flat surface.

The top edge of the cut-off
should be positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line.

Driver Side Shown
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly. They are covered by
a rubber caps.
The adjustment screw can be
turned with a 6 mm hex driver.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.

Vehicle Care

Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 9‑39.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting

9-37

Fog Lamps

{ WARNING
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician service them.
The up-level vehicle has HID
headlamps. The park lamp function
is also a function of the HID
headlamp. After an HID headlamp
bulb has been replaced, the beam
might be a slightly different shade
than it was originally. This is normal.

To replace fog lamp bulb:
1. Pull out the push-pins located on
the underside of the protection
shield to remove the shield.
2. Reach up behind the front
bumper area from under the
vehicle to access the lamp
housing.
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by lifting the two
plastic clips.

9-38

Vehicle Care

4. Remove the bulb socket from
the lamp housing by turning the
bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.

License Plate Lamp
(Sedan)

3. Turn the socket
counterclockwise and
remove it.

To replace one of these bulbs:

4. Pull the bulb straight out to
remove it.

5. Pull the old bulb from the lamp
housing keeping the bulb
straight as you pull it out.

5. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket.

6. Install a new bulb.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp
assembly.

7. Reinstall the electrical connector
by pushing in the two plastic
clips.
8. Push the bulb socket into the
lamp housing and turn the
socket one-quarter turn
clockwise.
1. Push tab to remove the license
plate lamp.
2. Turn the license plate lamp
assembly down to remove it.

Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp
(Wagon)

9-39

To replace one of these bulbs:

6. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install into lamp assembly.

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Wagon) on page 1‑19 for more
information.

7. Turn the lamp assembly into
the liftgate engaging the clip
side first.
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp

C. Lamp Assembly
4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove
from lamp assembly (C).
Passenger side shown,
driver side similar
2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly towards the right.
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to
remove from liftgate.

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
the bulb socket.

Fog Lamp
(Up Level Only)
License Plate Lamp

Bulb
Number
H11LL
W5WLL

For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer/retailer.

9-40

Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:

Electrical System
Overload

Headlamp Wiring

Windshield Wiper Motor

The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.

Power Windows and other
Power Accessories

When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance of
circuit overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.

Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.

Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice, may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Vehicle Care

Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block (CTS) on
page 9‑41 or Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS-V) on page 9‑45
or Engine Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS Wagon) on page 9‑48 and
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS) on page 9‑51 or Rear
Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V)
on page 9‑53 or Rear
Compartment Fuse Block (CTS
Wagon) on page 9‑55.

9-41

Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS)
The underhood fuse block is located
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment.

Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.

9-42

Vehicle Care
Mini-Fuses

Mini-Fuses

Usage

Mini-Fuses
AIRBAG
IGN

Airbag Switch

Antilock Braking
System (ABS)

AQS/
ISRVM/
REAR
CAMERA

Air Quality Sensor/
Inside Rear View
Mirror/Rear View
Camera

ABS
AFS

Adaptive Forward
Lighting System

AWD

BCM 1

Body Control
Module 1

BCM 2

Body Control
Module 2

BCM 3

Body Control
Module 3

BCM 4

Body Control
Module 4

BCM 5

Body Control
Module 5

BCM 6,
BCM 7

Body Control
Module 6 and 7

DISPLY

Display

Usage

Air Conditioning
A/C CLTCH
Clutch

All-Wheel Drive

Usage

DRL/LT
LO BEAM

DRL RT

Daytime Running
Lamps/Left
Low-Beam
Headlamp
Right Daytime
Running
Lamp (DRL)

Vehicle Care
Mini-Fuses
DRL/WSW
ECM

ECM/
TCM IGN

Usage
Daytime Running
Lamps/Windshield
Washer Pump

LO BEAM
DRL LEFT

Usage
Low-Beam
Daytime Running
Lamps (Left)

Engine Control
Module (ECM)

LT
HI BEAM

Left High-Beam
Headlamp

ECM, Transmission
Control
Module (TCM),
Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC),
PASS-Key III+
Module

LT
LO BEAM

Left Low-Beam
Headlamp

EMIS 1

Emission 1

EMIS 2

Emission 2

EVEN
COILS

Even Coils

FRT FOG

Mini-Fuses

Front Fog Lamps

HDLP
WASH

Not Used

HORN

Horn

LTR

Cigarette Lighter

MISC IGN

Ignition

NAV MTR

Navigation Motor

ODD COILS Odd Coils
PED PRO

Not Used

PWR
MODING

PassKey Module,
Body Control
Module

RT
HI BEAM

Right High-Beam
Headlamp

RT
LO BEAM

Right Low-Beam
Headlamp

RT
LO BEAM

Right Low-Beam
Headlamp

Mini-Fuses

Usage

SPARE

Spare

SPARE

Spare

STR/WHL/
CNTRL

9-43

Steering Wheel
Illumination

Transmission
TCM BATT Control Module
Battery
Transmission Output
TOSS/BRK
Speed Sensor/Brake
VAC RLY
Vacuum Relay
WPR
SPARE

Windshield Wiper
Spare

J-Case
Fuses
ABS MTR
BLWR

Usage
ABS Motor
Blower

BRK
Brake
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump
EPB

Not Used

9-44

Vehicle Care

J-Case
Fuses

Usage

FAN 1

Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2

REAR
DEFOG

Rear Defogger

STRTR

Starter

SPARE

Spare

WSW/HTR
Relays

Relays

Usage

FAN S/P

Cooling Fan
Series/Parallel

FAN 1

Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
HDLP
WASH

Not Used
Usage

HI BEAM

High-Beam
Headlamp
Horn
Ignition 1

Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch

IGN 1

DRL
(W/O HID)
LO BEAM
(HID)

Daytime Running
Lamps (without High
Intensity Discharge),
Low-Beam
Headlamps (High
Intensity Discharge)

LO BEAM
(W/O HID)
LT DRL
(HID)

PWR/TRN

Low-Beam (without
High Intensity
Discharge), Left
Daytime Running
Lamp (High Intensity
Discharge)

Usage
Powertrain

REAR
DEFOG

Rear Defogger

RT
DRL (HID)

Right Daytime
Running Lamp
(High Intensity
Discharge)

Not Used

HORN

A/C
CMPRSR

Relays

SPARE

Spare

STRTR

Starter

WPR

Windshield Wiper

WPR HI

Windshield Wiper
High Speed

WSW

Windshield
Washer Pump

Vehicle Care

9-45

Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS-V)
The underhood fuse block is located
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment.

Mini-Fuses
Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.

Usage

Mini-Fuses

Usage

A/C CLTCH

Air Conditioning
Clutch

AIRBAG
IGN

Airbag Switch

ABS

Antilock Braking
System (ABS)

AFS

Adaptive Forward
Lighting System

AQS/
ISRVM/
REAR
CAMERA

Air Quality Sensor/
Inside Rear View
Mirror/Rear View
Camera

BCM 1

Body Control
Module 1

9-46

Vehicle Care

Mini-Fuses

Usage

BCM 2

Body Control
Module 2

BCM 3

Body Control
Module 3

BCM 4

Body Control
Module 4

BCM 5

Body Control
Module 5

BCM 6,
BCM 7

Body Control
Module 6 and 7

DISPLY

Display

DRL LT

Left Daytime
Running Lamps

DRL RT

Right Daytime
Running
Lamp (DRL)

DRL/WSW
ECM

Daytime Running
Lamps/Windshield
Washer Pump
Engine Control
Module (ECM)

Mini-Fuses

ECM/
TCM IGN

Usage
ECM, Transmission
Control
Module (TCM),
Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC),
PASS-Key III+
Module

EMIS 1

Emission 1

EMIS 2

Emission 2

EVEN
COILS

Even Coils

FRT FOG

Front Fog Lamps

HDLP
WASH

Headlamp Washer

HORN

Horn

INTCLR

Intercooler Pump

LT
HI BEAM

Left High-Beam
Headlamp

LT
LO BEAM

Left Low-Beam
Headlamp

LTR

Cigarette Lighter

Mini-Fuses

Usage

MISC IGN

Ignition

NAV MTR

Navigation Motor

ODD COILS Odd Coils
PED PRO

Not Used

PWR
MODING

PassKey Module,
Body Control
Module

RT
HI BEAM

Right High-Beam
Headlamp

RT
LO BEAM

Right Low-Beam
Headlamp

SPARE
STR/WHL/
CNTRL
S/ROOF

Spare
Steering Wheel
Illumination
Sunroof

Transmission
TCM BATT Control Module
Battery
WPR

Windshield Wiper

Vehicle Care
J-Case
Fuses
ABS MTR
BLWR
EPB

Usage
ABS Motor
Blower
Electric Park Brake
Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2
MR Ride/
Suspension Control

REAR
DEFOG

Rear Defogger

STRTR

Starter

SPARE

Spare

WSW/HTR
Relays

Usage

Relays

FAN 1

Cooling Fan 1

SPARE

Spare

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2

STRTR

Starter

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

FAN 1

MRTD

Relays

Not Used
Usage

A/C
CMPRSR

Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch

FAN S/P

Cooling Fan
Series/Parallel

HDLP
WASH
HI BEAM

Headlamp Washer
High-Beam
Headlamp

HORN

Horn

IGN 1

Ignition 1

INTCLR

Intercooler Pump

LT DRL

Left Daytime
Running Lamps

LO BEAM

Low Beam

PWR/TRN

Powertrain

REAR
DEFOG

Rear Defogger

RT DRL

Right Daytime
Running Lamp

9-47

Usage

WPR

Windshield Wiper

WPR HI

Windshield Wiper
High Speed

WSW

Daytime Running
Lamps/Windshield
Washer Pump

9-48

Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS Wagon)
The underhood fuse block is located
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment.

Mini-Fuses
Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.

Usage

Mini-Fuses

Usage

A/C CLTCH

Air Conditioning
Clutch

AIRBAG
IGN

Airbag Switch

ABS

Antilock Braking
System (ABS)

AFS

Adaptive Forward
Lighting System

AQS/
ISRVM/
REAR
CAMERA

Air Quality Sensor/
Inside Rear View
Mirror/Rear View
Camera

Vehicle Care
Mini-Fuses
AWD

Usage

Mini-Fuses

All-Wheel Drive

BCM 1

Body Control
Module 1

BCM 2

Body Control
Module 2

BCM 3

Body Control
Module 3

BCM 4

Body Control
Module 4

BCM 5

Body Control
Module 5

BCM 6,
BCM 7

Body Control
Module 6 and 7

DISPLY

Display

DRL RT

Right Daytime
Running
Lamp (DRL)

Usage

DRL/LT
LO BEAM

Daytime Running
Lamps/Left
Low-Beam
Headlamp

DRL/WSW

Daytime Running
Lamps/Windshield
Washer Pump

ECM

ECM/
TCM IGN

Engine Control
Module (ECM)
ECM, Transmission
Control
Module (TCM),
Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC),
PASS-Key III+
Module

EMIS 1

Emission 1

EMIS 2

Emission 2

EVEN
COILS

Even Coils

Mini-Fuses
FRT FOG

9-49

Usage
Front Fog Lamps

HDLP
WASH

Headlamp Washer

HORN

Horn

LO BEAM
DRL LEFT

Low-Beam
Daytime Running
Lamps (Left)

LT
HI BEAM

Left High-Beam
Headlamp

LT
LO BEAM

Left Low-Beam
Headlamp

LTR

Cigarette Lighter

MISC IGN

Ignition

NAV MTR

Navigation Motor

ODD COILS Odd Coils
PED PRO

Not Used

9-50

Vehicle Care

Mini-Fuses

Usage

PWR
MODING

PassKey Module,
Body Control
Module

PWR
OUTLET

Console Auxiliary
Power Outlet

RT
HI BEAM

Right High-Beam
Headlamp

RT
LO BEAM

Right Low-Beam
Headlamp

RT
LO BEAM

Right Low-Beam
Headlamp

SPARE
STR/WHL/
CNTRL

ABS MTR
BLWR

Usage
ABS Motor

BRK
Brake
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump
EPB

Electric Park Brake

A/C
CMPRSR

Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch

DRL
(W/O HID)
LO BEAM
(HID)

Daytime Running
Lamps (without High
Intensity Discharge),
Low-Beam
Headlamps (High
Intensity Discharge)

Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2

FAN S/P

Cooling Fan
Series/Parallel

REAR
DEFOG

Rear Defogger

FAN 1

Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2

Spare

Steering Wheel
Illumination

STRTR

Starter

Windshield Wiper

Usage

FAN 1

SPARE

Transmission Output
TOSS/BRK
Speed Sensor/Brake
VAC RLY
Vacuum Relay

Relays

Blower

Spare

Transmission
TCM BATT Control Module
Battery

WPR

J-Case
Fuses

TRLR
WSW/HTR

Trailer Towing

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
HDLP
WASH

Not Used
HI BEAM

Headlamp Washer
High-Beam
Headlamp

HORN

Horn

IGN 1

Ignition 1

Vehicle Care
Relays

Usage

LO BEAM
(W/O HID)
LT DRL
(HID)

Low-Beam (without
High Intensity
Discharge), Left
Daytime Running
Lamp (High Intensity
Discharge)

PWR/TRN

Powertrain

REAR
DEFOG
RT
DRL (HID)

9-51

Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS)
The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of the battery, on the right
side of the trunk. The battery access door must be removed to access the
fuse block.

Rear Defogger
Right Daytime
Running Lamp (High
Intensity Discharge)

SPARE

Spare

STRTR

Starter

WPR

Windshield Wiper

WPR HI

Windshield Wiper
High Speed
Relays
FUEL/DR/
RELSE
LCK

Usage
Not Used

Relays

LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp
MRKR/LP

Lock

Usage
Not Used

9-52

Vehicle Care

Relays

Usage

Mini-Fuses

REAR/FOG Not Used

EE SEAT

RT/POS/LP Not Used

FUEL/
PUMP

STOP/LP

Not Used
Trunk Release

UNLCK

Unlock

AIRBAG
AMP

Not Used
Fuel Pump

LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp

TRUNK/
RELSE

Mini-Fuses

Usage

MSM

Usage
Airbag System
Amplifier

Memory Seat
Module

ONSTAR

OnStar® System

PDM

Passenger Door
Module

RDO

Audio System

Auxiliary Power
Outlet

RDO/SPKR Audio Speakers

CNSTR/
VENT

Canister Vent

DR/LCK

Door Lock

Remote Keyless
RKE/
Entry System,
PASS-KEY/ Pass-Key Theft
MDL
Deterrent Feature
Module

AUX/
OUTLET

ECM

Engine Control
Module (ECM)

REAR/FOG Not Used

Mini-Fuses

Usage

RT/POS/LP Not Used
RT/POS/LP Right Position Lamp
RVC/SNSR

Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor

S/ROOF

Sunroof

STOP/LP

Not Used

THEFT/
UGDO

Theft Deterrent
System, Universal
Home Remote
System

TRLR/
POS/LP

Not Used

TRUNK/
RELSE

Trunk Release

Vehicle Care
Circuit
Breakers

Usage

DRV/
Left Front
PWR/SEAT Power Seat
LT/
REAR/
WNDW

9-53

Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V)
The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of the battery, on the right
side of the trunk. The battery access door must be removed to access the
fuse block.

Left Rear Window

PWR CLMN

Power Steering
Column

PWR/
WNDW

Power Window

PASS/
Right Front
PWR/SEAT Power Seat
REAR/
WNDW

Right Rear Window

Relays
FUEL/DR/
RELSE
LCK

Usage
Not Used

Relays

LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp
MRKR/LP

Lock

Usage
Not Used

9-54

Vehicle Care

Relays

Usage

Mini-Fuses

REAR/FOG Not Used

EE SEAT

RT/POS/LP Not Used

FUEL/
PUMP

STOP/LP

Not Used

TRUNK/
RELSE

Trunk Release

UNLCK

Unlock

Mini-Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP

Not Used
Fuel Pump

LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp
MSM

Usage
Airbag System
Amplifier

AUX/
OUTLET

Auxiliary Power
Outlet

CNSTR/
VENT

Canister Vent

DR/LCK

Door Lock

ECM

Usage

Engine Control
Module (ECM)

Memory Seat
Module

ONSTAR

OnStar® System

PDM

Passenger Door
Module

RDO

Audio System

Mini-Fuses

Remote Keyless
RKE/
Entry System,
PASS-KEY/ Pass-Key Theft
MDL
Deterrent Feature
Module
RT/POS/LP Right Position Lamp
RT/POS/LP Not Used
RVC/SNSR
SPARE
STOP/LP

RDO/SPKR Audio Speakers
REAR/
Rear Differential
DIFF/PUMP Cooling Pump

Usage

Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
Spare
Not Used

THEFT/
UGDO

Theft Deterrent
System, Universal
Home Remote
System

TRUNK/
RELSE

Trunk Release

REAR/FOG Not Used

Vehicle Care
Circuit
Breakers

Usage

DRV/
Left Front
PWR/SEAT Power Seat
LT/
REAR/
WNDW

9-55

Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS Wagon)
The rear compartment fuse block is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle, behind the trim panel in the rear compartment.

Left Rear Window

PASS/
Right Front
PWR/SEAT Power Seat
PWR CLMN

Power Steering
Column

PWR/
WNDW

Power Window

REAR/
WNDW

Right Rear Window

Relays
FUEL/DR/
RELSE
LCK

Usage
Not Used

Relays

LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp
MRKR/LP

Lock

Usage
Not Used

9-56

Vehicle Care

Relays

Usage

REAR/FOG Not Used
RT/POS/LP Not Used

Mini-Fuses

Usage

AUX/
OUTLET

Auxiliary Power
Outlet

STOP/LP

Not Used

CNSTR/
VENT

Canister Vent

TRUNK/
RELSE

Trunk Release

DR/LCK

Door Lock

UNLCK

Unlock

Mini-Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP

ECM
Usage

Airbag System
Amplifier

FUEL/
PUMP

Engine Control
Module (ECM)
Fuel Pump

LT/POS/LP Left Position Lamp

Mini-Fuses
MSM

Usage
Memory Seat
Module

ONSTAR

OnStar® System

PDM

Passenger Door
Module

RDO

Audio System

RDO/SPKR Audio Speakers
REAR/FOG Not Used
REAR/
WSW

Rear Windshield
Wiper/Washer

Vehicle Care
Mini-Fuses

Usage

Remote Keyless
RKE/
Entry System,
PASS-KEY/ Pass-Key Theft
MDL
Deterrent Feature
Module
RT/POS/LP Not Used
RT/POS/LP Right Position Lamp
RVC/SNSR
S/ROOF

Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor

Mini-Fuses
STOP/LP
THEFT/
UGDO

Usage
Not Used
Theft Deterrent
System, Universal
Home Remote
System

TRLR/
POS/LP

Trailer Turn Position
Lamps

WASH/
PUMP

Windshield
Washer Pump

Circuit
Breakers

9-57

Usage

DRV/
Left Front
PWR/SEAT Power Seat
LT/
REAR/
WNDW

Left Rear Window

PASS/
Right Front
PWR/SEAT Power Seat
PWR CLMN

Power Steering
Column

PWR/
WNDW

Power Window

REAR/
WNDW

Right Rear Window

Sunroof

9-58

Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
.

Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12.
Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your
tires are cold. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
.

Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.

Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged,
replace them.

See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation on page 9‑67 for
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed driving.

Vehicle Care

Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice
covered roads often, you may want
to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but
they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of
performance as winter tires on
snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction
on snow and ice covered roads.
With winter tires, there may be
decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After switching to winter
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
See your dealer/retailer for details
regarding winter tire availability and
proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 9‑75.

If you choose to use winter tires:
.

Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel
positions.

Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire's maximum speed capability.

Low-Profile Tires
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18,
P235/50R18, 255/40ZR19 or
285/35ZR19 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile tires.
These tires are designed for
very responsive driving on wet

9-59

or dry pavement. You may also
notice more road noise with
low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If the vehicle has

low-profile tires, they are more
susceptible to damage from
road hazards or curb impact
than standard profile tires.
Tire and/or wheel assembly
damage can occur when
coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes,
or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb.
The vehicle warranty does not
cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when
possible avoid contact with
curbs, potholes, and other
road hazards.

9-60

Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.

Summer Performance Tires
Many General Motors high
performance models come
factory-equipped with tires that
are optimized for maximum dry
and wet road performance while
still retaining satisfactory tread
life, excellent durability, and low
noise levels. In severe winter
climates where snowfall may be
significant, these tires may be
found to provide less traction.

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.

(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).

Vehicle Care

and gone flat. If your vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑102 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 9‑81 .

The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 9‑78 .
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.

9-61

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air

(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is
the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.

9-62

Vehicle Care

(E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 9‑66 .
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.

Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code:
A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply
construction.

Vehicle Care
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic

transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)

9-63

before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 9‑66 .
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12 .

9-64

Vehicle Care

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12 .
GAWR RR: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the rear axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12 .
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on light duty trucks
and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:
The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12 .
Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on
a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12 .

Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 9‑74 .
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that
provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 9‑78 .

9-65

Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑12 .
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12 .

9-66

Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.

If your tires have too much air
(over-inflation), you can get
the following:
.

Unusual wear

Notice: Do not let anyone tell

Poor handling

you that under-inflation or
over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:

Rough ride

Needless damage from
road hazards

Too much flexing

Too much heat

Tire overloading

Premature or
irregular wear

Poor handling

Reduced fuel economy

A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.

For additional information
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12 .
How you load your vehicle
affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. The compact
spare should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑102 .

Vehicle Care
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gage to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gage firmly onto the valve to get
a pressure measurement. If the
cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with
the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation

{ WARNING
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
(Continued)

9-67

WARNING (Continued)
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18,
255/40ZR19 or 285/35ZR19 size
tires, they will require inflation
pressure adjustment when
driving your vehicle at speeds
of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.
Set the cold inflation pressure to
the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall,
or 300 kPa (44 psi), whichever is
lower. See the example following.

9-68

Vehicle Care

When you end this high-speed
driving, return the tires to the cold
tire inflation pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12 and Tire Pressure on
page 9‑66.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and
inflation pressure molded on the
tire's sidewall, in small letters,
near the rim flange. It will read
something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)
Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the
inflation pressure for high-speed
driving at 44 psi (300 kPa).

Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle's
tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.

Vehicle Care
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9‑69 for
additional information.

Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry and Science Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
and Science Canada.

9-69

Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle
has one. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle's tires and transmits the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Using the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the driver can also check tire
pressure levels using the DIC. For
additional information and details
about the DIC operation and
displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑31 and
Tire Messages on page 4‑48.

9-70

Vehicle Care
This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure in the tire(s) are
getting low and need to be inflated
to the proper pressure.

When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster.
A DIC warning message to check
the pressure in a specific tire is also
shown on the DIC display screen.
The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come
at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather
when the vehicle is first started, and
then turn off as you start to drive.

The Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for the
tires when they are cold. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12,
for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle. Also see
Tire Pressure on page 9‑66.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 9‑73, Tire Rotation on
page 9‑73 and Tires on page 9‑58.

Notice: Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer/
retailer.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 9‑84 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.

Vehicle Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
.

One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one. The spare
tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The DIC message
should go off once you re-install
the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.

The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle's tires.
The DIC message should go off
after successfully completing
the sensor matching process.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than
those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. See
Buying New Tires on page 9‑75.

9-71

Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
replace one or more of the TPMS
sensors or rotate your vehicle's
tires, the identification codes need
to be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer/retailer for service.

9-72

Vehicle Care

The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
To decrease the tire's air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve
cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall, to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match
the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions, the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.

The TPMS matching process is
outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to
ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter's lock and
unlock buttons at the same time
for approximately five seconds.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and Tire Learning Active
message displays on the DIC
screen.
4. Start with the driver side
front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the
valve stem. Activate the TPMS
sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure
for 10 seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which can take up to 30 seconds
to sound, confirms that the

TPMS sensor identification code
has been matched to this tire
position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn
chirp, for the driver side rear tire,
the horn sounds two more times
to signal the tire learning mode
is no longer active. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire
and loading information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.

Vehicle Care

Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on
page 9‑74 for more information.

Tire Rotation
Tire rotation is not
recommended if the vehicle has
255/40R19 size tires on the front
wheels and 285/35R19 size tires
on the rear wheels.
Different tire sizes should not be
rotated front to rear. Each tire
and wheel should only be used
in its original front or rear
position.

9-73

Tire rotation is recommended if
the vehicle has the same size
tires on all four wheel positions.
These tires should be rotated
every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑3 .
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon as
possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 9‑74 and Wheel
Replacement on page 9‑80 .

Use the rotation pattern shown
here when rotating tires of the
same size installed on all four
wheel positions.

9-74

Vehicle Care

After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 9‑66 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑12 .
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑69 .
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 11‑2 .

{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑81.

When It Is Time for New
Tires
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.

One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or
less of tread remaining.

Vehicle Care
The vehicle needs new tires if any
of the following statements are true:
.

You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.

You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.

The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.

The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.

The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over
time. This is also true for the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one, even
if it is not being used. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this aging
takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically
wear out before they degrade due to
age. If you are unsure about the
need to replace the tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer
for more information.

9-75

Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it
was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance
Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to
have tires that are designed to give
the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.

9-76

Vehicle Care

GM's exclusive TPC Spec system
considers over a dozen critical
specifications that impact the
overall performance of your
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure
monitoring performance. GM's TPC
Spec number is molded onto the
tire's sidewall near the tire size.
If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 9‑60, for additional
information.

GM recommends replacing tires in
sets of four. This is because uniform
tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most
like it did when the tires were new.
Replacing less than a full set of tires
can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See
Tire Inspection on page 9‑73 and
Tire Rotation on page 9‑73.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose snow tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire's maximum speed capability.

{ WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you to
lose control while driving. If you
mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on
your vehicle), brands, or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes
(other than those originally
installed on your vehicle), brands
or types, may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the correct size, brand, and type
tires on all four wheels.

Vehicle Care

{ WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle's
tires with those that do not have a
TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give an
inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are
installed on it. Non-TPC Spec rated
tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑69.
Your vehicle's original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12,
for more information about the Tire
and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle.

9-77

Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a
different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti-lock
brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can
be affected.
See Buying New Tires on
page 9‑75 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3 for
additional information.

9-78

Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.

The grades are molded on the
sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG) system
does not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 25 to 30 cm
(10 to 12 inches), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

Vehicle Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are
A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
It should be noted that the
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.

9-79

Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels on your
vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall
performance. Adjustments to wheel
alignment and tire balancing will not
be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one
side or the other, the alignment
might need to be checked. If you
notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
CTS-V models should only use
adhesive wheel weights to balance
the tires and wheels.

9-80

Vehicle Care

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it
(except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.

If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.

{ WARNING
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 9‑81 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.

Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ WARNING
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for
use on the vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid
damage to the vehicle, drive
slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the
wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on
the rear tires.

9-81

If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.

9-82

Vehicle Care

A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING

the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.

Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall on
you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even
killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 5‑4.

1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)

Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.

9-83

This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
Then see Tire Changing on
page 9‑94. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 9‑84.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.

9-84

Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit

{ WARNING
Over-inflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.

{ WARNING
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ inch) in
the tread area of the tire. It can
also be used to inflate an under
inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service on
page 12‑6.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.

Vehicle Care

9-85

Tire Sealant

This vehicle may have one of
the following tire sealant and
compressor kits. The kit includes:

Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.

A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gage
D. Pressure Deflation Button
(If equipped)
E. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose (Black)
H. Power Plug

Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/
retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister”
following.
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.

9-86

Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for 5 minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.

Vehicle Care
Always do a safety check first.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 9‑81. Do not remove any
objects that have penetrated
the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Sedan) on page 9‑92 or
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Wagon) on
page 9‑93.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.

9-87

4. Remove the valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)
counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
page 4‑12.

9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.

If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.

The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
The pressure gage (C) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.

9-88

Vehicle Care

10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gage (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66.
The pressure gage (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Service on page 12‑6.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and
will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and
the sealant is distributed in
the tire, therefore, Steps 12
through 18 must be done
immediately after Step 11.

Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
15. Replace the sealant/air
hose (F), and the power
plug (H) back in their original
location.

Vehicle Care
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (E) and place
it in a highly visible location.
The label is a reminder not to
exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) until
the damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.

19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11
under “Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on
page 12‑6.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.

9-89

20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (E) and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance
with local state codes and
practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer/
retailer.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 161 km
(100 miles) of driving to have
the tire repaired or replaced.

9-90

Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. See
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑81.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Sedan) on page 9‑92 or
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Wagon) on
page 9‑93.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H).

Vehicle Care
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
page 4‑12.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
clockwise to the Air Only
position.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gage (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66.
The pressure gage (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.

9-91

If you inflate the tire higher
than the recommended
pressure you can adjust the
excess pressure by pressing
the pressure deflation
button (D), if equipped, until the
proper pressure reading is
reached. This option is only
functional when using the air
only hose (G).
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (G) from the tire
valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.

9-92

Vehicle Care

14. Replace the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H) and
cord back in its original
location.

Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister

15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
without Pressure Deflation Button

To remove the sealant canister:
2. Press the canister release
button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer/retailer.
5. Push the new canister into
place.

Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
(Sedan)
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.

The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the trunk.

A. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
B. Foam Container
C. Wing Nut
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk
(Sedan) on page 1‑17.
2. Locate the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) in the center
of the cargo area.
3. Remove the wing nut (C) that
holds the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) in place.

Vehicle Care
4. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) from the foam
container (B).

To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the
steps.

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
with Pressure Deflation Button

Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
(Wagon)

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk
(Sedan) on page 1‑17.

The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the rear of the vehicle.

9-93

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Wagon) on page 1‑19.
2. Pull up on the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) to remove it
from the foam container (B).
It is not necessary to remove the
subwoofer (C) to access the tire
sealant and compressor kit,
however, if you want to remove it
see Tire Changing on
page 9‑94 for instructions.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.

2. Remove the retainer that holds
the tire sealant and compressor
kit in place.
3. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from the foam
container.

A. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
B. Foam Container
C. Subwoofer (Optional)

9-94

Vehicle Care

Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools (Sedan)

To access the spare tire and jacking
equipment:
1. Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Remove the stow rod cap by
pulling it straight up off of
the rod.
3. Turn the wing nut (A) on the
compact spare tire (B)
counterclockwise to remove.
4. Remove the spare tire and place
it next to the flat tire.
5. The tools you will be using next
include the jack (C), wheel
wrench (D), and extension (E).

Sedan
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Extension
F. Strap

Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools (Wagon)

Vehicle Care
To access the spare tire and jacking
equipment:

9-95

To remove the jack:

1. Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Remove the subwoofer (D),
if the vehicle has one.
To remove the subwoofer:
2.1. Turn the nut (A)
counterclockwise to
remove.
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
D. Subwoofer
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Extension
G. Cable

2.2. Disconnect the
connector wire.
2.3. Pull the subwoofer (D) up to
remove it from the stow rod.

1. Remove the retainer nut (A).

3. Remove the spare tire (B) and
place it next to the flat tire.

2. Remove the jack stowage
bracket (B).

4. Remove the jack (C), wheel
wrench (E), and extension (F).

3. Slide the jack (C) forward to
remove it from the floor storage
bracket.

9-96

Vehicle Care

Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 9‑81 for more
information.

3. Find the jacking location using
the diagram above and
corresponding V-shaped locating
notches located in the plastic
molding.

2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do
not remove them yet, using the
wheel wrench. Turn the handle
about 180 degrees, then return
the handle back to the starting
position. This avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut for
each turn.

4. Insert the hooked end of the
extension handle through the
jack and the flat end through the
wheel wrench.

{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.

Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.

Raising your vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Notice: If you position the jack
under the rocker molding and
attempt to raise the vehicle, you
could break the molding and/or
cause other damage to your
vehicle. Always position the jack
so that when the jack head is
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch
located inboard from the rocker
molding.
5. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits
under the vehicle.

9-97

6. Raise the jack by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until the
slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the
V-shaped locating notches on
the plastic molding as shown.
7. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare
tire to fit under the vehicle.

9-98

Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑81.

9. Remove all the wheel nuts and
the flat tire.

{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
(Continued)

{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.

10. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
11. Install the spare tire.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on
with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.

Vehicle Care
13. Tighten each wheel nut by
turning it clockwise with your
hand until the wheel is held
against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by
turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the
jack completely.

{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.

9-99

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools

{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat
Load Floor (Sedan)
1. Put back all tools as they were
stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the
compartment cover back on.
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage
bag, if there is one.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
in a crisscross sequence as
shown.

3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
rear storage compartment.

9-100

Vehicle Care
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat
Load Floor (Wagon)
1. Return all tools as they were
stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the
compartment cover on.
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage
bag, if there is one.
3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
rear storage compartment.

4. Route the loop end of the
strap (C) through one of the
cargo tie-downs (A) located in
the rear of the vehicle.
5. Route the hook (B) through the
loop (C).
6. Pull the strap to tighten it around
the cargo tie-down (A).

7. Route the hook end of the strap
through the wheel.
8. Attach the hook to the cargo
tie-down in the rear of the
vehicle.
9. Slide the buckle to tighten the
cargo tie-down strap.
Use the following diagram as a
guide for storing the compact spare
tire in the trunk.
4. Route one of the hooks (A), at
the end of the cable provided,
through the liftgate striker (B).

Vehicle Care
5. Slide both D-rings (E) on each
side of the vehicle as far
rearward as they will go.
6. Route one hook (A) under the
wheel spoke (C) and place the
hook into the slot in the cargo
rail on the driver side of the
vehicle.

Compact Spare Tire and Tools
(Sedan)

D. Wheel Wrench

Use the following diagram as a
guide for storing the compact spare
tire and tools in the trunk:

F. Strap

7. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side
forward to engage the hook.
8. Route the other hook under the
wheel spoke (D) and place the
hook into the slot in the cargo
rail on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
9. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side
forward to engage the hook.
A. Wing Nut
B. Compact Spare Tire or
Flat Tire (valve stem down)
C. Jack

9-101

E. Extension
Reverse the instructions for
removing the spare tire and tools to
store the compact spare tire.

9-102

Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire

Compact Spare Tire and Tools
(Wagon)

{ WARNING

Use the following diagram as a
guide for storing the compact
spare tire and tools in the rear
compartment area:

Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
D. Subwoofer
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Extension
G. Strap
Reverse the instructions for
removing the spare tire and tools to
store the compact spare tire.

If your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare tire it was fully
inflated when the vehicle was new, it
can lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your

Vehicle Care
convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare
tire or wheel with other wheels or
tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.

Jump Starting
If the vehicle battery has run down,
you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.

They contain acid that can
burn you.

They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.

They contain enough
electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.

9-103

Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.

9-104

Vehicle Care

2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are,
it could cause a ground
connection you do not want.
You would not be able to start
your vehicle and the bad
grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in Neutral
before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories
when jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlets. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations or the remote
positive (+) and remote
negative (−) terminals of the
other vehicle. Then locate the
remote positive (+) location on
your vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for more information
on locations the terminals.

Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) ground location, as
shown in the illustration. It is
located on the rear passenger
side of the vehicle . See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6. You should always
use this remote ground location,
instead of the terminal on the
battery.

Vehicle Care
Notice: If you connect a negative
cable to the Engine Control
Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that attach
to the ECM bracket, you may
damage the ECM. Always attach
the negative cable to your
vehicle's remote negative ground
location, instead of the ECM, ECM
bracket, or any cables attached to
the ECM bracket.

{ WARNING
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.

9-105

{ WARNING
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.

9-106

Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause
sparks.

7. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.

6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.

9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away from the
dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move. The
electrical connection is just as
good there, and the chance of
sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle's remote
negative (−) ground location is
for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.

Vehicle Care
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.

9-107

To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.

9-108

Vehicle Care

Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle needs to be towed.
See Roadside Service on
page 12‑6.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes
(such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing
following.

Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as dinghy towing and
dolly towing. Dingy towing is towing
the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground. Dolly towing is towing

the vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.

What is the towing capacity
of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow
vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.

What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.

Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional
advice and equipment
recommendations.

Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.

Dinghy Towing

Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing
(Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

9-109

3. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 8‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 8‑35.
4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) for
an automatic transmission
or in 1 (First) for a manual
transmission.
5. Securely attach the vehicle
being towed to the dolly.

Notice: If the vehicle is
towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle
must be towed, a dolly or a trailer
should be used. If an all-wheel-drive
vehicle must be towed, a trailer
should be used. See “Dolly Towing”
following for more information.

6. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow a rear-wheel-drive vehicle from
the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

9-110

Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing
(All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components.
Do not tow an all-wheel-drive
vehicle with any of its wheels on
the ground.
All-wheel-drive vehicles can only be
towed with all four wheels on a
trailer.

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Vehicle Care
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.

Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight and use a car
washing soap.

9-111

Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer. Follow all
manufacturer directions regarding
correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.

9-112

Vehicle Care

Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7.

Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle's
chrome with soap and water
after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.

Vehicle Care
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.

Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.

Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.

Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.

Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.

Wipers can be damaged by:
.

Extreme dusty conditions

Sand and salt

Heat and sun

Snow and ice, without proper
removal

9-113

Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.

9-114

Vehicle Care

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your dealer's/
retailer's body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.

Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.

Vehicle Care
Your dealer/retailer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.

Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.

Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.

Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.

Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.

Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.

Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.

Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.

9-115

9-116

Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet

To clean:

Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.

A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.

2. Remove excess moisture.

Leather

3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.

For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.

5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.

For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.

To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat, steam,
or spot lifters or spot removers,
or shoe polish on leather.
Many commercial leather cleaners
and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect leather
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.

4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.

If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.

Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

9-117

9-118

Vehicle Care

2 NOTES

Service and Maintenance

Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-3

Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-11

General Information
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.

10-1

Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
.

Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12.

Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.

Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 8‑49.

10-2

Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how
and the proper tools and
equipment. If in doubt, see your
dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on
page 9‑4.

At your General Motors dealer/
retailer, you can be certain that you
will receive the highest level of
service available. Your dealer/
retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
GM replacement parts, as well as,
up to date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 10‑9. We recommend the
use of genuine parts from your
dealer/retailer.

Rotation of New Tires
Tire rotation is not recommended if
the vehicle has different size tires
on the front and rear wheels. If tire
rotation is recommended for the
vehicle, to maintain ride, handling,
and performance of the vehicle,
it is important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed
when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km
(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire
Rotation on page 9‑73.

Service and Maintenance

Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
An Emission Control Service.
When the “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained
service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 9‑12.

Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 9‑110. Worn or
damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 9‑33.

Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66.

Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑73.

If tire rotation is recommended
for the vehicle, rotate tires.
See Tire Rotation on page 9‑73.

Fluids visual leak check
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and
the fluid level checked.

Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15.

Every Engine Oil Change
.

Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
An Emission Control Service.

Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant on
page 9‑18.

Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑25.

10-3

10-4
.

Service and Maintenance

Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).

Additional Required Services

Once a Year

At Each Fuel Stop

Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.

See Starter Switch Check on
page 9‑31.

See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control System
Check on page 9‑32.

See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 9‑32.

See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 9‑32.

Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.

Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.

If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of the
kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 9‑84.

Body hinges and latches, key
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and sunroof
(if equipped) lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
More frequent lubrication may
be required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 2‑25.

Engine oil level check. See
Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant on
page 9‑18.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑25.

Once a Month
.

Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑66.

Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑73.

Service and Maintenance
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.

Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
Passenger compartment air
filter replacement (or every
12 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be required if vehicle is
driven regularly under dusty
conditions.
CTS-V only: 6‐speed manual
transmission fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles
mainly driven in heavy city traffic
in hot weather, in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service.

CTS-V only: Clutch hydraulic
system drain, flush, and refill.

CTS-V only: Brake hydraulic
system drain, flush, and refill
(severe service only) for vehicles
used for high performance
operation.

First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.

Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15.

Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in
heavy city traffic in hot weather,
in hilly or mountainous terrain,
when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi,
police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑13.

10-5

CTS-V only: 6‐speed manual
transmission fluid change
(normal service).

All-wheel-drive vehicles only:
Transfer case fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles
mainly driven in heavy city
traffic in hot weather, in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. During any
maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt
from the underbody, care should
be taken to not directly spray
the transfer case output seals.
High pressure water can
overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case
fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.

10-6
.

Service and Maintenance

CTS-V only: Rear axle fluid
change (severe service only) for
vehicles mainly driven in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer, used
for high speed or competitive
driving, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See Rear
Axle on page 9‑30.

First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.

Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service).
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑13.
All-wheel-drive vehicles only:
Transfer case fluid change
(normal service). During any
maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt
from the underbody, care should
be taken to not directly spray
the transfer case output seals.

High pressure water can
overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case
fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
.

Spark plug replacement.
An Emission Control Service.

CTS-V only: Supercharger drive
belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious
damage and replacement,
if needed.

First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.

Engine cooling system drain,
flush, and refill, cooling system
and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser
(or every 5 years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
System on page 9‑18. An
Emission Control Service.

6.2L supercharged V8 engine
only: Intercooler system drain,
flush, and refill, cooling system
and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser
(or every 5 years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
System on page 9‑18.
An Emission Control Service.

Engine accessory drive belt
inspection for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage
and replacement, if needed.
An Emission Control Service.

Service and Maintenance

10-7

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage

Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be identified with the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. However,
not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM
standard. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
For the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on page 9‑10.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18.

Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
Hydraulic Power Steering System
Hydraulic Clutch System
Manual Transmission (CTS)

DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DOT 4 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,
in Canada 88901244).
SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. U.S. 88862475,
in Canada 88862476).

10-8

Service and Maintenance
Usage

Manual Transmission (CTS-V)
Automatic Transmission

Fluid/Lubricant
Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Rear Drive Module and Transfer Case
Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
(All-Wheel Drive)
Chassis Lubrication

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint
Weatherstrip Conditioning

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668,
in Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).

Service and Maintenance

10-9

Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part

GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

3.0L V6 Engine

15875795

A3096C

3.6L V6 Engine

15875795

A3096C

6.2L V8 Engine

25898499

A3105C

3.0L V6 Engine

25177917

PF2129

3.6L V6 Engine

25177917

PF2129

6.2L V8 Engine

89017524

PF48

19130403

CF133

3.0L V6 Engine

12622561

41–109

3.6L V6 Engine

12597464

41-990

6.2L V8 Engine

12571165

41-104

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Engine Oil Filter

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs

10-10

Service and Maintenance
Part

GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in)

15890062

—

Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in)

15890064

—

Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in)

20791461

—

Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in)

20791462

—

Wiper Blades — Except CTS-V

Wiper Blades — CTS-V

Service and Maintenance

10-11

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

10-12

Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

10-13

10-14

Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

Technical Data

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4

11-1

Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN
is the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.

Service Parts
Identification Label
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.

This label, on the spare tire cover,
has the following information:
.

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)

Model designation

Paint information

Production options and special
equipment

Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.

11-2

Technical Data

Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7 for more information.
Application

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

Capacities
Metric

English

For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.

Cooling System — Engine
3.0L V6 Engine

10.3 L

10.9 qt

3.6L V6 Engine

10.3 L

10.9 qt

6.2L V8 Engine

11.8 L

12.5 qt

2.3 L

2.4 qt

3.0L V6 Engine

5.7 L

6.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine

5.7 L

6.0 qt

6.2L V8 Engine

5.7 L

6.0 qt

Cooling System — Intercooler, 6.2L V8 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter

Technical Data

Application

Capacities
Metric

English

Fuel Tank

68.1 L

18.0 gal

Transfer Case — AWD

1.0 L

1.1 qt

3.0L V6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic

6.3 L

6.7 qt

3.6L V6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic

6.3 L

6.7 qt

6.2L V8 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic

6.3 L

6.7 qt

3.0L, 3.6L V6 Engines, 6-Speed Manual

1.8 L

1.9 qt

6.2L V8 Engine, 6-Speed Manual

3.8 L

4.0 qt

190 Y

140 lb ft

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

Wheel Nut Torque

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

11-3

11-4

Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine

VIN Code

Transmission

Spark Plug Gap

3.0L V6 Engine

Automatic
Manual

1.1 mm (0.043 in)

3.6L V6 Engine

Automatic
Manual

1.1 mm (0.043 in)

6.2L V8 Engine

Automatic
Manual

1.0 mm (0.040 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

CTS 3.6L V6 Engine
CTS 3.0L V6 Engine

CTS-V 6.2L V8 Engine

Customer Information

Customer
Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12

Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-15
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

12-1

Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service or
parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general
manager.

12-2

Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the United States,
call the Cadillac Customer
Assistance Center, 24 hours a day,
at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, call
the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre at
1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.

Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This is available from the
vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.

Dealership name and location.

Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both
General Motors and your dealer are
committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. However, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, you can file with the Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the

decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.

Customer Information
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in
the Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel
your concerns have been addressed
after the following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two.
General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe

our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or
call the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at
the following address:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).

12-3

Customer Assistance
Offices
Cadillac encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer
Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112

12-4

Customer Information

From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994

Canada — Customer
Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112

Overseas — Customer
Assistance
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance

dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)

General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/
cadillac

01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with Cadillac by

Online Owner Center

Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
.

Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more

Online service and maintenance
records

Find Cadillac dealers for service
nationwide

Exclusive privileges and offers

Recall notices for your specific
vehicle

OnStar® and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries

Customer Information
Other Helpful Links:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
Cadillac Merchandise —
www.cadillaccollection.com
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/
helpcenter
.

FAQ

My GM Canada
(Canada) — www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
access to:
.

My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.

My Dealers/Retailers: Save
details such as address and
phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.

My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.

My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.

12-5

GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program

This program, available to qualified
applicants for cost reimbursement
of eligible aftermarket adaptive
equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or
a wheelchair/scooter lift for the
vehicle.
For more information on the limited
offer visit gmmobility.com or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.

12-6

Customer Information

Roadside Service

Coverage

Cadillac Owner Privileges™

In the United States or Canada, call
1-800-882-1112.

Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first.

Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.

Lock-Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.

Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.

Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire
with spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.

Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,
call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.

Your name, home address, and
home telephone number

Telephone number of your
location

Location of the vehicle

Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle

Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle

Description of the problem

In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.

Customer Information
It is your responsibility for the
repair or replacement of the
tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
.

Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. Additional
travel information is also
available. Allow three weeks
for delivery.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: If your trip is
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the 5 year/
100,000 miles (160 000 km)
Powertrain warranty period.
Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.

12-7

Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. only)

Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance

Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
Service is more than an auto club or
towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States
with the advantage of contacting
a Cadillac advisor and, where
available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site
service.

Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.

Legal fines.

Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.

Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.

A dealer technician will travel to
your location within a 30 mile
radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed
to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Each technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle
complete with the necessary
Cadillac parts and tools required
to handle most roadside repairs.

Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.

Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.

Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.

Trip Routing Service: Limit of
six requests per year.

12-8
.

Customer Information

Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are
required. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you
make arrangements and explain
how to receive payment.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original
receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service
Appointments

Courtesy Transportation
Program

When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact your
dealer/retailer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a
service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer/
retailer can help minimize your
inconvenience.

To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base
Warranty Coverage period in
Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both
the U.S. and Canada.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call
your dealership/retailer, let them
know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to
bring the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.

Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.

Customer Information
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
you with shuttle service to get you
to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the
dealer's shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts
for reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.

12-9

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will
be limited and must be supported
by original receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a
rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

12-10

Customer Information

Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
General Motors reserves the right
to unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle's
resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle
was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly
in subsequent collisions.

Customer Information
Aftermarket parts are not covered
by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure
related to such parts are not
covered by that warranty.

Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a
collision repair facility that meets
your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.

12-11

Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.

If a Crash Occurs

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.

Gather the following information:

If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Service on page 12‑6.
.

Driver's name, address, phone
number

Driver's license number

Owner's name, address, phone
number

Vehicle license plate

Vehicle make, model and
model year

12-12

Customer Information

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)

Insurance company and policy
number

General description of the
damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 2‑33.

Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an
active role in its repair. If you have
a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to
the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.

Service Publications
Ordering Information

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if
your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.

Service Manuals

If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as cost stays within reasonable
limits.

Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on engines,
transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering,
body, etc.

Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.

Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.

Customer Information
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.

ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web
at: helminc.com

Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order
Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles. To
request an order form, specify year
and model name of the vehicle.

Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change
without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.

12-13

Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.

12-14

Customer Information

However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.

Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government

To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safecar.gov; or
write to:

If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to
notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C. 20590

Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safecar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,
or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Customer Information

Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal
preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature
settings.

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
.

How various systems in your
vehicle were operating

Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened

How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal

How fast the vehicle was
traveling

12-15

This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.

12-16

Customer Information

GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on
data collection and use. See also
OnStar® System on page 4‑59 in
this manual for more information.

Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.

Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.

Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with RSS-210/211 of
Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

INDEX

A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-40
AdjustmentS
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-15
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

Airbag System (cont.)
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-33
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-29
Airbags
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-22
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 8-32, 9-30
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-48

i-1

Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-110
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-114
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Audio System
Diversity Antenna System . . . .6-15
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . .6-27
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-26
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Shiftlock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

i-2

INDEX

B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-33
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Boost Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34, 8-35
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5, 9-37
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
License Plate Lamps . . . 9-38, 9-39
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75

C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Cargo
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-1
Central Door Unlock System . . . 1-15
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-23
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-32
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-51
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 2-59
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-49
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

INDEX
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-110
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-114
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 8-40
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Engine Temperature Gage . . . .4-20
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Covers
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-15
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

i-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Central Door Unlocking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 8-32, 9-30
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Driving
Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-40
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .8-12
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

i-4

INDEX

Driving (cont.)
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

E
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Electrical System
Engine
Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . 9-41, 9-45, 9-48
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Rear
Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . 9-51, 9-53, 9-55
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Check and Service Engine
Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6

Engine (cont.)
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Coolant Temperature Gage . . .4-20
Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Cooling System Messages . . .4-40
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-25
Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-15
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 5-2
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .9-13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . 5-5, 9-37
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

INDEX
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-50
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-50
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Requirements, California . . . . .8-50
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Fuses
Engine
Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . 9-41, 9-45, 9-48
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Rear
Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . 9-51, 9-53, 9-55

i-5

Gages
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . . . 6-27
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Headlamps
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-30
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .4-31
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

i-6

INDEX

Heater
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 8-18, 8-19
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1

J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103

K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-42
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . 1-5, 1-7
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-3
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38, 9-39
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-23
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Lighting
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .4-29
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2

INDEX
Lights (cont.)
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-21
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Central Door Unlocking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

M
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-23
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-48
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-40
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

i-7

Messages (cont.)
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Object Detection System . . . . .4-45
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

i-8

INDEX

N
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Net
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

O
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .9-12
Engine Oil Pressure Gage . . . .4-19
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-43

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode . . . 9-24
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

P
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34, 8-35
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-24
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-35
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . . 9-3
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Pregnancy,
Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . 12-16
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-8
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

INDEX

R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-16
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-46
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-9
Rearview Mirrors
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108

Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 1-5, 1-7
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-42
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-41
Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45

i-9

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-26
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-25
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

i-10

INDEX

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 2-9
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-6
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 2-59
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .10-11

Service (cont.)
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-40
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Speed Limiter, Engine . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Storage Areas
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Cargo Management System . . . 3-3
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Storing the Tire
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . 9-92, 9-93
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Check
Automatic Transmission
Shiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

INDEX

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4
Theft-Deterrent
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24, 1-25
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 2-7
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-94
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-69
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-68

Tires (cont.)
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84
Sealant and
Compressor Kit,
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92, 9-93
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78
Wheel Alignment and
Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-80
When It Is Time for
New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-54
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-59
General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 9-108

i-11

Towing (cont.)
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58, 8-59
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-37
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-41
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58, 8-59
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

i-12

INDEX

U
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-44
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Universal Remote System . . . . . 4-61
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108

Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 9-92, 9-93
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts
Identification Label . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

W
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 4-50
Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-80
When It Is Time for
New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Where to Put the Child
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-33
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : null
Modified                        : 2014:11:06 14:17:45.38-05:00
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 3946585
Extracted                       : 2014:11:03 20:58:25.896-05:00
Sha 1                           : 30525a0582b28bd7b80f15c11cc278849fbe5092
Modify Date                     : 2009:08:07 16:59:38-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:08:07 16:59:38-04:00
Create Date                     : 2009:08:07 16:28:26-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.490/W Unicode
Producer                        : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.490/W Unicode
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2010/cadillac/ctsv
Instance ID                     : uuid:b190967c-ec7f-498e-b160-b8ce5e613510
Document ID                     : uuid:bf6e5ab6-93eb-4d8f-80e9-7d0bf8a4bea9
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 464
Creator                         : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.490/W Unicode

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Cadillac 2010 Cts V Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation